42 U.S.C. 6291-6309; 28 U.S.C. 2461 note.
This part establishes the regulations for the implementation of part B of title III (42 U.S.C. 6291-6309) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub. L. 94-163), as amended by Pub. L. 95-619, Pub. L. 100-12, Pub. L. 100-357, and Pub. L. 102-486 which establishes an energy conservation program for consumer products other than automobiles.
For purposes of this part, words shall be defined as provided for in section 321 of the Act and as follows—
(1) Employs two filaments, operated separately and in combination, to provide three light levels; and
(2) Is designated on the lamp packaging and marketing materials as being a 3-way incandescent lamp.
(1) Is connected to a main power source;
(2) Has been activated; and
(3) Provides one or more main functions.
(a) Weatherized warm air furnaces or boilers are located out-of-doors;
(b) Warm air furnaces which are not weatherized are located indoors and all combustion and ventilation air is admitted through grill or ducts from the outdoors and does not communicate with air in the conditioned space;
(c) Boilers which are not weatherized are located within the heated space.
(1) Is specifically designed to operate in a household appliance, has a maximum wattage of 40 watts, is sold at retail (including an oven lamp, refrigerator lamp, and vacuum cleaner lamp); and
(2) Is designated and marketed for the intended application, with
(i) The designation on the lamp packaging; and
(ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being for appliance use.
(1) With respect to general service fluorescent lamps, general service incandescent lamps, and incandescent reflector lamps: Lamps that have essentially identical light output and electrical characteristics—including lumens per watt (lm/W) and color rendering index (CRI).
(2) With respect to faucets and showerheads: Have the identical flow control mechanism attached to or installed within the fixture fittings, or the identical water-passage design features that use the same path of water in the highest flow mode.
(1) A bulged section below the major diameter of the bulb and above the approximate baseline of the bulb, as shown in figure 1 (RB) on page 7 of ANSI C79.1-1994, (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3); and
(2) A finished size and shape shown in ANSI C78.21-1989 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), including the referenced reflective characteristics in part 7 of ANSI C78.21-1989.
(1) Integral, such that the equipment is attached to the ceiling fan prior to the time of retail sale; or
(2) Attachable, such that at the time of retail sale the equipment is not physically attached to the ceiling fan, but may be included inside the ceiling fan at the time of sale or sold separately for subsequent attachment to the fan.
(1) Means a device that—
(i) Is designed to convert line voltage AC input into lower voltage AC or DC output;
(ii) Is able to convert to only one AC or DC output voltage at a time;
(iii) Is sold with, or intended to be used with, a separate end-use product that constitutes the primary load;
(iv) Is contained in a separate physical enclosure from the end-use product;
(v) Is connected to the end-use product via a removable or hard-wired male/female electrical connection, cable, cord, or other wiring; and
(vi) Has nameplate output power that is less than or equal to 250 watts;
(2) But, does not include any device that—
(i) Requires Federal Food and Drug Administration listing and approval as a medical device in accordance with section 513 of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 360(c)); or
(ii) Powers the charger of a detachable battery pack or charges the battery of a product that is fully or primarily motor operated.
(1) A CRI less than 40, as determined according to the method set forth in CIE Publication 13.3 (incorporated by reference;
(2) A correlated color temperature less than 2,500K or greater than 7,000K as determined according to the method set forth in IESNA LM-9 (incorporated by reference;
(1) A color rendering index of less than 50, as determined according to the test method given in CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); or
(2) A correlated color temperature of less than 2,500K, or greater than 4,600K, where correlated temperature is computed according to the “Computation of Correlated Color Temperature and Distribution Temperature,” Journal of the Optical Society of America, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
(1) Of a type—
(i) Which in operation consumes, or is designed to consume, energy or, with respect to showerheads, faucets, water closets, and urinals, water; and
(ii) Which, to any significant extent, is distributed in commerce for personal use or consumption by individuals;
(2) Without regard to whether such article of such type is in fact distributed in commerce for personal use or consumption by an individual, except that such term includes fluorescent lamp ballasts, general service fluorescent lamps, incandescent reflector lamps, showerheads, faucets, water closets, and urinals distributed in commerce for personal or commercial use or consumption.
(1) Of a type specified in section 322 of the Act, or
(2) That is a ceiling fan, ceiling fan light kit, medium base compact fluorescent lamp, dehumidifier, battery charger, external power supply, or torchiere.
(1) A refrigerated surface (evaporator) that condenses moisture from the atmosphere;
(2) A refrigerating system, including an electric motor;
(3) An air-circulating fan; and
(4) Means for collecting or disposing of the condensate.
(1) The voltage marked as the intended operating voltage;
(2) The mid-point of the voltage range if the lamp is marked with a voltage range; or
(3) 120 V if the lamp is not marked with a voltage or voltage range.
(1) Contained in a separate enclosure from the product; and
(2) Intended to be removed or disconnected from the product for recharging.
(1) An elliptical section below the major diameter of the bulb and above the approximate baseline of the bulb, as shown in figure 1 (RE) on page 7 of ANSI C79.1-1994, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); and
(2) A finished size and shape shown in ANSI C78.21-1989, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
(1) Any straight-shaped lamp (commonly referred to as 4-foot medium bipin lamps) with medium bipin bases of nominal overall length of 48 inches and rated wattage of 25 or more;
(2) Any U-shaped lamp (commonly referred to as 2-foot U-shaped lamps) with medium bipin bases of nominal overall length between 22 and 25 inches and rated wattage of 25 or more;
(3) Any rapid start lamp (commonly referred to as 8-foot high output lamps) with recessed double contact bases of nominal overall length of 96 inches;
(4) Any instant start lamp (commonly referred to as 8-foot slimline lamps) with single pin bases of nominal overall length of 96 inches and rated wattage of 52 or more;
(5) Any straight-shaped lamp (commonly referred to as 4-foot miniature bipin standard output lamps) with miniature bipin bases of nominal overall length between 45 and 48 inches and rated wattage of 26 or more; and
(6) Any straight-shaped lamp (commonly referred to 4-foot miniature bipin high output lamps) with miniature bipin bases of nominal overall length between 45 and 48 inches and rated wattage of 49 or more.
(a) Is designed to be the principal heating source for the living space of a residence;
(b) Is not contained within the same cabinet with a central air conditioner whose rated cooling capacity is above 65,000 Btu per hour;
(c) Is an electric central furnace, electric boiler, forced-air central furnace, gravity central furnace, or low pressure steam or hot water boiler; and
(d) Has a heat input rate of less than 300,000 Btu per hour for electric boilers and low pressure steam or hot water boilers and less than 225,000 Btu per hour for forced-air central furnaces, gravity central furnaces, and electric central furnaces, gravity central furnaces, and electric central furnaces.
(1) Fluorescent lamps designed to promote plant growth;
(2) Fluorescent lamps specifically designed for cold temperature applications;
(3) Colored fluorescent lamps;
(4) Impact-resistant fluorescent lamps;
(5) Reflectorized or aperture lamps;
(6) Fluorescent lamps designed for use in reprographic equipment;
(7) Lamps primarily designed to produce radiation in the ultra-violet region of the spectrum; and
(8) Lamps with a Color Rendering Index of 87 or greater.
(1) An appliance lamp;
(2) A black light lamp;
(3) A bug lamp;
(4) A colored lamp;
(5) An infrared lamp;
(6) A left-hand thread lamp;
(7) A marine lamp;
(8) A marine signal service lamp;
(9) A mine service lamp;
(10) A plant light lamp;
(11) A reflector lamp;
(12) A rough service lamp;
(13) A shatter-resistant lamp (including a shatter-proof lamp and a shatter-protected lamp);
(14) A sign service lamp;
(15) A silver bowl lamp;
(16) A showcase lamp;
(17) A 3-way incandescent lamp;
(18) A traffic signal lamp;
(19) A vibration service lamp;
(20) A G shape lamp (as defined in ANSI C78.20) (incorporated by reference;
(21) A T shape lamp (as defined in ANSI C78.20) (incorporated by reference;
(22) A B, BA, CA, F, G16-1/2, G-25, G30, S, or M-14 lamp (as defined in ANSI C79.1-2002) (incorporated by reference;
(1)
(2)
(3)
(i) To which the occupants have access either:
(A) Directly from outside of the building, or
(B) Through a common hall that is accessible to other living quarters and that does not go through someone else's living quarters, and
(ii) Occupied by one or more persons who live and eat separately from occupant(s) of other living quarters, if any, in the same building.
(1) Any lamp (commonly referred to as lower wattage non-reflector general service lamps, including any tungsten halogen lamp) that has a rated wattage between 30 and 199, has an E26 medium screw base, has a rated voltage or voltage range that lies at least partially in the range of 115 and 130 volts, and is not a reflector lamp.
(2) Any incandescent reflector lamp.
(3) Any general service incandescent lamp (commonly referred to as a high-or higher-wattage lamp) that has a rated wattage above 199 (above 205 for a high wattage reflector lamp).
(1) Any lamp that is—
(i) Specifically designed to be used for special purpose applications; and
(ii) Unlikely to be used in general purpose applications, such as the applications described in the definition of “General Service Incandescent Lamp” in this section; or
(2) Any lamp not described in the definition of “General Service Incandescent Lamp” in this section that is excluded by the Secretary, by rule, because the lamp is—
(i) Designed for special applications; and
(ii) Unlikely to be used in general purpose applications.
(1) Is not a colored incandescent lamp; and
(2) When operated at the rated voltage and wattage of the incandescent lamp—
(A) Has a color point with (x,y) chromaticity coordinates on the C.I.E. 1931 chromaticity diagram, figure 2, page 3 of IESNA LM-16 (incorporated by reference;
(B) Has a color point with (x,y) chromaticity coordinates on the C.I.E. 1931 chromaticity diagram, figure 2, page 3 of IESNA LM-16 (incorporated by reference;
(1) Is connected to a main power source; and
(2) Is not providing any stand-by or active mode function.
(1) Such product (or its container) is labeled with the brand or trademark of a person other than a manufacturer of such product;
(2) The person with whose brand or trademark such product (or container) is labeled has authorized or caused such product to be so labeled; and
(3) The brand or trademark of a manufacturer of such product does not appear on such label.
(1) The design voltage if the design voltage is 115 V, 130 V or between 115V and 130 V:
(2) 115 V if the design voltage is less than 115 V and greater than or equal to 100 V and the lamp can operate at 115 V; and
(3) 130 V if the design voltage is greater than 130 V and less than or equal to 150 V and the lamp can operate at 130 V.
(1) With respect to fluorescent lamps and general service fluorescent lamps:
(i) If the lamp is listed in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference;
(ii) If the lamp is a residential straight-shaped lamp, and not listed in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference;
(iii) If the lamp is neither listed in one of the ANSI standards referenced in (1)(i) of this definition, nor a residential straight-shaped lamp, the electrical power of a lamp when measured according to the test procedures outlined in appendix R to subpart B of this part.
(2) With respect to general service incandescent lamps and incandescent reflector lamps, the electrical power measured according to the test procedures outlined in appendix R to subpart B of this part.
(1) Is designed for use to replace an existing fluorescent lamp ballast in a previously installed luminaire;
(2) Is marked “FOR REPLACEMENT USE ONLY”;
(3) Is shipped by the manufacturer in packages containing not more than 10 fluorescent lamp ballasts; and
(4) Has output leads that when fully extended are a total length that is less than the length of the lamp with which the ballast is intended to be operated.
(1) A lamp is designed exclusively for residential applications if it will not function for more than 100 hours with a commercial high-power-factor ballast.
(2) A lamp is designed primarily and marketed exclusively for residential applications if it:
(i) Is permanently and clearly marked as being for residential use only;
(ii) Has a life of 6,000 hours or less when used with a commercial high-power-factor ballast;
(iii) Is not labeled or represented as a replacement for a fluorescent lamp that is a covered product; and
(iv) Is marketed and distributed in a manner designed to minimize use of the lamp with commercial high-power-factor ballasts.
(3) A manufacturer may market and distribute a lamp in a manner designed to minimize use of the lamp with commercial high-power-factor ballasts by:
(i) Packaging and labeling the lamp in a manner that clearly indicates the lamp is for residential use only and includes appropriate instructions concerning proper and improper use; if the lamp is included in a catalog or price list that also includes commercial/industrial lamps, listing the lamp in a separate residential section accompanied by notes about proper use on the same page; and providing as part of any express warranty accompanying the lamp that improper use voids such warranty; or
(ii) Using other comparably effective measures to minimize use with commercial high-power-factor ballasts.
(1) Has a minimum of 5 supports with filament configurations that are C-7A, C-11, C-17, and C-22 as listed in Figure 6-12 of the IESNA Lighting Handbook (incorporated by reference;
(2) Is designated and marketed specifically for ‘rough service’ applications, with
(i) The designation appearing on the lamp packaging; and
(ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being for rough service.
(1) Equipment designed and marketed to perform any of the following functions (on a continuous basis):
(i) Monitor, detect, record, or provide notification of intrusion or access to real property or physical assets or notification of threats to life safety.
(ii) Deter or control access to real property or physical assets, or prevent the unauthorized removal of physical assets.
(iii) Monitor, detect, record, or provide notification of fire, gas, smoke, flooding, or other physical threats to real property, physical assets, or life safety.
(2) This term does not include any product with a principal function other than life safety, security, or surveillance that:
(i) Is designed and marketed with a built-in alarm or theft-deterrent feature; or
(ii) Does not operate necessarily and continuously in active mode.
(1) Has a coating or equivalent technology that is compliant with NSF/ANSI 51 (incorporated by reference;
(2) Is designated and marketed for the intended application, with
(i) The designation on the lamp packaging; and
(ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being shatter-resistant, shatter-proof, or shatter-protected.
(1) Is designed for, and produces, at least 1.2 inches of external static pressure when operated at the certified air volume rate of 220-350 CFM per rated ton of cooling; and
(2) When applied in the field, uses high velocity room outlets generally greater than 1000 fpm which have less than 6.0 square inches of free area.
(1) That has rated cooling capacities no greater than 30,000 BTU/hr;
(2) That has an outdoor or indoor unit having at least two overall exterior dimensions or an overall displacement that:
(i) Is substantially smaller than those of other units that are:
(A) Currently usually installed in site-built single family homes; and
(B) Of a similar cooling, and, if a heat pump, heating capacity; and
(ii) If increased, would certainly result in a considerable increase in the usual cost of installation or would certainly result in a significant loss in the utility of the product to the consumer; and
(3) Of a product type that was available for purchase in the United States as of December 1, 2000.
(1) Is designed and marketed for operation of mercury vapor lamps used in quality inspection, industrial processing, or scientific use, including fluorescent microscopy and ultraviolet curing; and
(2) In the case of a specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast, the label of which—
(i) Provides that the specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast is ‘For specialty applications only, not for general illumination’; and
(ii) Specifies the specific applications for which the ballast is designed.
(1) Is connected to a main power source; and
(2) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions:
(i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; or
(ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions.
(1) The basic model of a system used as a tested combination shall consist of one outdoor unit, with one or more compressors, that is matched with between 2 and 5 indoor units; for multi-split systems, each of these indoor units shall be designed for individual operation.
(2) The indoor units shall—
(i) Represent the highest sales model family, or another indoor model family if the highest sales model family does not provide sufficient capacity (see ii);
(ii) Together, have a nominal capacity that is between 95% and 105% of the nominal capacity of the outdoor unit;
(iii) Not, individually, have a capacity that is greater than 50% of the nominal capacity of the outdoor unit;
(iv) Operate at fan speeds that are consistent with the manufacturer's specifications; and
(v) All be subject to the same minimum external static pressure requirement (i.e., 0 inches of water column for non-ducted, see Table 2 in appendix M to subpart B of this part for ducted indoor units) while being configurable to produce the same static pressure at the exit of each outlet plenum when manifolded as per section 2.4.1 of appendix M.
(1) Is manufactured prior to January 23, 2010;
(2) Is not weatherized;
(3) Is clearly and permanently marked for installation only through an exterior wall;
(4) Has a rated cooling capacity no greater than 30,000 Btu/hr;
(5) Exchanges all of its outdoor air across a single surface of the equipment cabinet; and
(6) Has a combined outdoor air exchange area of less than 800 square inches (split systems) or less than 1,210 square inches (single packaged systems) as measured on the surface described in paragraph (5) of this definition.
(1) Vented gas log sets and
(2) Vented gas hearth products that meet all of the following four criteria:
(i) Certified to ANSI Z21.50 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), but not to ANSI Z21.88 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3);
(ii) Sold without a thermostat and with a warranty provision expressly voiding all manufacturer warranties in the event the product is used with a thermostat;
(iii) Expressly and conspicuously identified on its rating plate and in all manufacturer's advertising and product literature as a “Decorative Product: Not for use as a Heating Appliance”; and
(iv) With respect to products sold after January 1, 2015, not equipped with a standing pilot light or other continuously-burning ignition source.
(1) Has filament configurations that are C-5, C-7A, or C-9, as listed in Figure 6-12 of the IESNA Lighting Handbook (incorporated by reference;
(2) Has a maximum wattage of 60 watts;
(3) Is sold at retail in packages of 2 lamps or less; and
(4) Is designated and marketed specifically for vibration service or vibration-resistant applications, with—
(i) The designation appearing on the lamp packaging; and
(ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being vibration service only.
(a) Storage type units which heat and store water at a thermostatically controlled temperature, including gas storage water heaters with an input of 75,000 Btu per hour or less, oil storage water heaters with an input of 105,000 Btu per hour or less, and electric storage water heaters with an input of 12 kilowatts or less;
(b) Instantaneous type units which heat water but contain no more than one gallon of water per 4,000 Btu per hour of input, including gas instantaneous water heaters with an input of 200,000 Btu per hour or less, oil instantaneous water heaters with an input of 210,000 Btu per hour or less, and electric instantaneous water heaters with an input of 12 kilowatts or less; and
(c) Heat pump type units, with a maximum current rating of 24 amperes at a voltage no greater than 250 volts, which are products designed to transfer thermal energy from one temperature level to a higher temperature level for the purpose of heating water, including all ancillary equipment such as fans, storage tanks, pumps, or controls necessary for the device to perform its function.
For
At 76 FR 70628, Nov. 14, 2011, § 430.2 was amended by adding the definition of “ballast luminous efficiency” in alphabetical order, effective Jan. 13, 2012.
(a)
(b)
(1) ARI 210/240-2006, Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment, approved March 26, 1998, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(2) [Reserved]
(c)
(1) ANSI C78.3-1991 (“ANSI C78.3”), American National Standard for Fluorescent Lamps-Instant-start and Cold-Cathode Types-Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved July 15, 1991; IBR approved for § 430.32.
(2) ANSI C78.20-2003, Revision of ANSI C78.20-1995 (“ANSI C78.20”), American National Standard for electric lamps—A, G, PS, and Similar Shapes with E26 Medium Screw Bases, approved October 30, 2003; IBR approved for § 430.2.
(3) ANSI C78.21-1989, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—PAR and R Shapes, approved March 3, 1989, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(4) ANSI C78.21-2003, Revision of ANSI C78.21-1995 with all supplements, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—PAR and R Shapes, approved October 30, 2003, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(5) ANSI_IEC C78.81-2005, Revision of ANSI C78.81-2003 (“ANSI C78.81”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved August 11, 2005; IBR approved for § 430.2, 430.32 and appendix R of subpart B.
(6) ANSI_IEC C78.81-2010 (“ANSI C78.81-2010”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved January 14, 2010; IBR approved for appendix Q and appendix Q1 to subpart B.
(7) ANSI C78.375-1997, Revision of ANSI C78.375-1991 (“ANSI C78.375”), American National Standard for Fluorescent Lamps—Guide for Electrical Measurements, first edition, approved September 25, 1997; IBR approved for appendix Q, appendix Q1 and appendix R to subpart B.
(8) ANSI_IEC C78.901-2005, Revision of ANSI C78.901-2001 (“ANSI C78.901”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Single-Based Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved March 23,
(9) ANSI C79.1-1994, American National Standard for Nomenclature for Glass Bulbs—Intended for Use with Electric Lamps, approved March 24, 1994, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(10) ANSI C79.1-2002, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Nomenclature for Glass Bulbs Intended for Use with Electric Lamps, approved September 16, 2002, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(11) ANSI_ANSLG_ C81.61-2006, Revision of ANSI C81.61-2005, (“ANSI C81.61”), American National Standard for electrical lamp bases—Specifications for Bases (Caps) for Electric Lamps, approved August 25, 2006, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(12) ANSI C82.1-2004, (“ANSI C82.1”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballast—Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast, approved November 19, 2004; IBR approved for appendix Q and appendix Q1 to subpart B.
(13) ANSI C82.2-2002, (“ANSI C82.2”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Ballasts, Approved June 6, 2002, IBR approved for appendix Q and appendix Q1 to subpart B.
(14) ANSI C82.3-2002, Revision of ANSI C82.3-1983 (R 1995) (“ANSI C82.3”), American National Standard for Reference Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps, approved September 4, 2002; IBR approved for appendix Q, appendix Q1 and appendix R to subpart B.
(15) ANSI C82.11 Consolidated-2002, (“ANSI C82.11”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—High-frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts—Supplements, approved March 11, 1999, August 5, 1999 and January 17, 2002; IBR approved for appendix Q and appendix Q1 to subpart B.
(16) ANSI C82.13-2002 (“ANSI C82.13”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—Definitions for Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts, approved July 23, 2002; IBR approved for appendix Q and appendix Q1 to subpart B.
(17) ANSI Z21.56-1994, Gas-Fired Pool Heaters, section 2.9, approved December 5, 1994, IBR approved for appendix P to subpart B.
(18) ANSI Z21.50-2007 (CSA 2.22-2007), (“ANSI Z21.50”), Vented Gas Fireplaces, Fifth Edition, Approved February 22, 2007, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(19) ANSI Z21.88-2009 (CSA 2.33-2009), (“ANSI Z21.88”), Vented Gas Fireplace Heaters, Fifth Edition, Approved March 26, 2009, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(d) [Reserved]
(e)
(1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 16-1983 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 16”) (RA 2009), (Reaffirmation of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 16-1983 [RA 1999]), Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners and Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners, ASHRAE approved October 18, 1988, and reaffirmed June 20, 2009. ANSI approved October 20, 1998 and reaffirmed June 25, 2009. IBR approved for appendix F to subpart B.
(2) ASHRAE 23-2005, Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units, approved February 10, 2005, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(3) ASHRAE 37-2005, Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, approved March 11, 2005, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(4) ASHRAE 41.1-1986 (Reaffirmed 2001), Standard Method for Temperature Measurement, approved February 18, 1987, IBR approved for appendix E and appendix M to subpart B.
(5) ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (Reaffirmed 1992), Standard Methods for Laboratory Airflow Measurement, approved October 1, 1987, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(6) ASHRAE 41.6-1994 (Reaffirmed 2001), Standard Method for Measurement of Moist Air Properties, approved August 30, 1994, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(7) ASHRAE 41.9-2000, Calorimeter Test Methods for Mass Flow Measurements of Volatile Refrigerants, approved October 6, 2000, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(8) ASHRAE/AMCA 51-1999/210-1999, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating,
(9) ASHRAE 103-1993, Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers, (with Errata of October 24, 1996) except for sections 3.0, 7.2.2.5, 8.6.1.1, 9.1.2.2, 9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2.1, 9.5.1.2.2, 9.5.2.1, 9.7.1, 10.0, 11.2.12, 11.3.12, 11.4.12, 11.5.12 and appendices B and C, approved October 4, 1993, IBR approved for § 430.23 and appendix N to subpart B.
(10) ASHRAE 116-1995 (RA 2005), Methods of Testing for Rating Seasonal Efficiency of Unitary Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps, approved July 24, 1995, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B.
(f)
(1) ASME/ANSI A112.18.1M-1996, Plumbing Fixture Fittings, approved April 4, 1996, IBR approved for appendix S to subpart B.
(2) ASME/ANSI A112.19.6-1995, Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals, approved April 6, 1995, IBR approved for § 430.2 and appendix T to subpart B.
(g)
(1) ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992, American National Standard, Household Electric Dishwashers, approved February 6, 1992, IBR approved for appendix C to subpart B and § 430.32.
(2) AHAM HLD-1-2009 (“AHAM HLD-1”), Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers, (2009), IBR approved for appendix D1 to subpart B.
(3) ANSI/AHAM HRF-1-1979, (Revision of ANSI B38.1-1970), (“HRF-1-1979”),
(4) AHAM HRF-1-2008, (“HRF-1-2008”), Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances (2008), including Errata to Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, Correction Sheet issued November 17, 2009, IBR approved for appendices A and B to subpart B.
(5) ANSI/AHAM RAC-1-2008 (“ANSI/AHAM RAC-1”), Room Air Conditioners, (2008; ANSI approved July 7, 2008), IBR approved for appendix F to subpart B.
(h)
(1) CEC Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies, August 11, 2004, IBR approved for appendix Z to subpart B.
(2) [Reserved]
(i)
(1) CIE 13.3-1995 (“CIE 13.3”), Technical Report: Method of Measuring and Specifying Colour Rendering Properties of Light Sources, 1995, ISBN 3 900 734 57 7; IBR approved for § 430.2 and appendix R to subpart B.
(2) CIE 15:2004 (“CIE 15”), Technical Report: Colorimetry, 3rd edition, 2004, ISBN 978 3 901906 33 6; IBR approved for appendix R to subpart B.
(j)
(1) ENERGY STAR Testing Facility Guidance Manual: Building a Testing Facility and Performing the Solid State Test Method for ENERGY STAR Qualified Ceiling Fans, Version 1.1, approved December 9, 2002, IBR approved for appendix U to subpart B.
(2) ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Residential Light Fixtures, Version 4.0, approved January 10, 2005, IBR approved for appendix V to subpart B.
(3) ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Dehumidifiers, approved January 1, 2001, IBR approved for appendix X to subpart B.
(4) Energy Star Program Requirements for Single Voltage External Ac-
(5) Test Methodology for Determining the Energy Performance of Battery Charging Systems, approved December 2005, IBR approved for appendix Y to subpart B.
(k)
(1)
(2) IESNA LM-9-99, (“LM-9”), IESNA Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Fluorescent Lamps, 1999. IBR approved for § 430.2 and appendix R to subpart B.
(3) IESNA LM-16-1993 (“IESNA LM-16”), IESNA Practical Guide to Colorimetry of Light Sources, December 1993, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(4) IES LM-20-1994, IESNA Approved Method for Photometric Testing of Reflector-Type Lamps, approved December 3, 1994, IBR approved for appendix R to subpart B.
(5) IESNA LM-45-00, (“LM-45”), IESNA Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric Measurements of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps, approved May 8, 2000; IBR approved for appendix R to subpart B.
(6) IES LM-58-1994, IESNA Guide to Spectroradiometric Measurements, approved December 3, 1994, IBR approved for appendix R to subpart B.
(l)
(1) International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 62301 (“IEC 62301”),
(2) [Reserved]
(m)
(1) NSF/ANSI 51-2007 (“NSF/ANSI 51”), Food equipment materials, revised and adopted April 2007, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(2) [Reserved]
(n)
(1) “Computation of Correlated Color Temperature and Distribution Temperature,” A.R. Robertson, Journal of the Optical Society of America, Volume 58, Number 11, November 1968, pages 1528-1535, IBR approved for § 430.2.
(2) [Reserved]
(o)
(1) ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for [Compact Fluorescent Lamps] CFLs, Version 3.0, approved October 30, 2003, IBR approved for appendix V to subpart B.
(2) ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for [Compact Fluorescent Lamps] CFLs, approved August 9, 2001, IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B.
(a)
(b)
(1)
(2) [Reserved]
(c)
(1) IEEE 1515-2000, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electronic Power Subsystems: Parameter Definitions, Test Conditions, and Test Methods, March 30, 2000.
(2) IEEE 100, Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms, 7th Edition, January 1, 2006.
(d)
(1) IEC 62301, Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power, First Edition, June 13, 2005.
(2) IEC 60050, International Electrotechnical Vocabulary.
(e) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program, Standards Services Division, NIST, 100 Bureau Drive, Stop 2140, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140, 301-975-4016, or go to
(1) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program Handbook 150-01, Energy Efficient Lighting Products, Lamps and Luminaires, August 1993.
(2) [Reserved]
This subpart contains test procedures required to be prescribed by DOE pursuant to section 323 of the Act.
When the test procedures of this section call for rounding off of test results, and the results fall equally between two values of the nearest dollar, kilowatt-hour, or other specified nearest value, the result shall be rounded up to the nearest higher value.
(a)
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(2) The estimated annual operating cost for electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers with an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year:
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(3) The estimated annual operating cost for any other specified cycle type for electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers shall be the product of the following three factors, the
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the specified cycle type, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 to this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(4) The energy factor for electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle, shall be:
(i) For electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers without an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of:
(A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to 6.1 of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.1 of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A), divided by—
(B) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A), the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the second decimal place; and
(ii) For electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers having an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of:
(A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to 6.1 of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.1 of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A), divided by —
(B) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A), the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the second decimal place.
(5) The annual energy use of electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, shall be the following, rounded to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year:
(i) For electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers without an anti-sweat heater switch, the representative average use cycle of 365 cycles per year multiplied by the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A), and
(ii) For electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers having an anti-sweat heater switch, the representative average use cycle of 365 cycles per year multiplied by half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.2 (6.3.6 for externally vented units) of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A).
(6) Other useful measures of energy consumption for electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers shall be those measures of energy consumption for electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers that the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions which are derived from the application of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A).
(7) The estimated regional annual operating cost for externally vented electric refrigerators and externally vented electric refrigerator-freezers without an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year:
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year,
(ii) The regional average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.3.7 of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.3.7 of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(8) The estimated regional annual operating cost for externally vented electric refrigerators and externally vented electric refrigerator-freezers with an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year:
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the regional average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.3.7 of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.3.7 of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(9) The estimated regional annual operating cost for any other specified cycle for externally vented electric refrigerators and externally vented electric refrigerator-freezers shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year:
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) The regional average per-cycle energy consumption for the specified cycle, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.3.7 of appendix A1 of this subpart before appendix A becomes mandatory and 6.3.7 of appendix A of this subpart after appendix A becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix A); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(10) The following principles of interpretation should be applied to the test procedure. The intent of the energy test procedure is to simulate typical room conditions (approximately 70 °F (21 °C)) with door openings, by testing at 90 °F (32.2 °C) without door openings. Except for operating characteristics that are affected by ambient temperature (for example, compressor percent run time), the unit, when tested under this test procedure, shall operate in a manner equivalent to the unit in typical room conditions. The energy used by the unit shall be calculated when a calculation is provided by the test procedure. Energy consuming components that operate in typical room conditions (including as a result of door openings, or a function of humidity), and that are not exempted by this test procedure, shall operate in an equivalent manner during energy testing under this test procedure, or be accounted for by all calculations as provided for in the test procedure. If:
(i) A product contains energy consuming components that operate differently during the prescribed testing
(ii) Applying the prescribed test to that product would evaluate it in a manner that is unrepresentative of its true energy consumption (thereby providing materially inaccurate comparative data), a manufacturer must obtain a waiver in accordance with the relevant provisions of 10 CFR part 430. Examples:
A. Energy saving features that are designed to be activated by a lack of door openings shall not be functional during the energy test.
B. The defrost heater should not either function or turn off differently during the energy test than it would when operating in typical room conditions.
C. Electric heaters that would normally operate at typical room conditions with door openings should also operate during the energy test.
D. Energy used during adaptive defrost shall continue to be tested and adjusted per the calculation provided for in this test procedure.
(b)
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(2) The estimated annual operating cost for freezers with an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year:
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(3) The estimated annual operating cost for any other specified cycle type for freezers shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year:
(i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year;
(ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the specified cycle type, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B); and
(iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(4) The energy factor for freezers, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle, shall be:
(i) For freezers not having an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of:
(A) The adjusted net refrigerated volume in cubic feet, determined according to 6.1 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.1 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B), divided by—
(B) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B), the resulting quotient
(ii) For freezers having an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of:
(A) The adjusted net refrigerated volume in cubic feet, determined according to 6.1 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.1 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B), divided by—
(B) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B), the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the second decimal place.
(5) The annual energy use of all freezers, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, shall be the following, rounded to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year:
(i) For freezers not having an anti-sweat heater switch, the representative average use cycle of 365 cycles per year multiplied by the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B), and
(ii) For freezers having an anti-sweat heater switch, the representative average use cycle of 365 cycles per year multiplied by half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 6.2 of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and 6.2 of appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B).
(6) Other useful measures of energy consumption for freezers shall be those measures the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and are derived from the application of appendix B1 of this subpart before appendix B becomes mandatory and appendix B of this subpart after appendix B becomes mandatory (see the note at the beginning of appendix B).
(7) The following principles of interpretation should be applied to the test procedure. The intent of the energy test procedure is to simulate typical room conditions (approximately 70 °F (21 °C)) with door openings, by testing at 90 °F (32.2 °C) without door openings. Except for operating characteristics that are affected by ambient temperature (for example, compressor percent run time), the unit, when tested under this test procedure, shall operate in a manner equivalent to the unit in typical room conditions. The energy used by the unit shall be calculated when a calculation is provided by the test procedure. Energy consuming components that operate in typical room conditions (including as a result of door openings, or a function of humidity), and that are not exempted by this test procedure, shall operate in an equivalent manner during energy testing under this test procedure, or be accounted for by all calculations as provided for in the test procedure. If:
(i) A product contains energy consuming components that operate differently during the prescribed testing than they would during representative average consumer use and
(ii) Applying the prescribed test to that product would evaluate it in a manner that is unrepresentative of its true energy consumption (thereby providing materially inaccurate comparative data), a manufacturer must obtain a waiver in accordance with the relevant provisions of 10 CFR part 430. Examples:
A. Energy saving features that are designed to be activated by a lack of door openings hall not be functional during the energy test.
B. The defrost heater should not either function or turn off differently
C. Electric heaters that would normally operate at typical room conditions with door openings should also operate during the energy test.
D. Energy used during adaptive defrost shall continue to be tested and adjusted per the calculation provided for in this test procedure.
(c)
(i) When cold water (50 °F) is used,
(A) For dishwashers having a truncated normal cycle as defined in section 1.15 of appendix C to this subpart,
(B) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(ii) When electrically-heated water (120 °F or 140 °F) is used,
(A) For dishwashers having a truncated normal cycle as defined in section 1.15 of appendix C to this subpart,
(B) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(iii) When gas-heated or oil-heated water is used,
(A) For dishwashers having a truncated normal cycle as defined in section 1.15 of appendix C to this subpart,
(B) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(B) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(2) The energy factor for dishwashers, EF, expressed in cycles per kilowatt-hour is defined as follows:
(i) When cold water (50 °F) is used,
(A) For dishwashers having a truncated normal cycle as defined in section 1.15 of appendix C to this subpart,
(B) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(ii) When electrically-heated water (120 °F or 140 °F) is used,
(A) For dishwashers having a truncated normal cycle as defined in section 1.15 of appendix C to this subpart,
(B) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(3) The estimated annual energy use, EAEU, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year is defined as follows:
(i) For dishwashers having a truncated normal cycle as defined in section 1.15 of appendix C to this subpart,
(ii) For dishwashers not having a truncated normal cycle,
(4) Other useful measures of energy consumption for dishwashers are those which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix C to this subpart.
(d)
(i) For an electric clothes dryer, the product of the following three factors:
(A) The representative average-use cycle of 283 cycles per year,
(B) The per-cycle combined total energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per-cycle, determined according to 4.6 of appendix D1 to this subpart, and
(C) The representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year, and
(ii) For a gas clothes dryer, the product of the representative average-use cycle of 283 cycles per year times the sum of:
(A) The product of the per-cycle gas dryer electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 4.2 of appendix D1 to this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary plus,
(B) The product of the per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption, in Btus per cycle, determined according to 4.3 of appendix D1 to this subpart, times the representative average unit cost for natural gas or propane, as appropriate, in dollars per Btu as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year plus,
(C) The product of the per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 4.5 of appendix D1 to this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary.
(2) The energy factor, expressed in pounds of clothes per kilowatt-hour, for clothes dryers shall be either the quotient of a 3-pound bone-dry test load for compact dryers, as defined by 2.7.1 of appendix D to this subpart before the date that appendix D1 becomes mandatory, or the quotient of a 7-pound bone-dry test load for standard dryers, as defined by 2.7.2 of appendix D to this subpart before the date that appendix D1 becomes mandatory, as applicable, divided by the clothes dryer energy consumption per cycle, as determined according to 4.1 for electric clothes dryers and 4.6 for gas clothes dryers of appendix D to this subpart before the date that appendix D1 becomes mandatory, the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the nearest hundredth (.01). Upon the date that appendix D1 to this subpart becomes mandatory, the energy factor is determined in accordance with 4.7 of appendix D1, the result then being rounded off to the nearest hundredth (.01).
(3) Upon the date that appendix D1 to this subpart becomes mandatory, the combined energy factor is determined in accordance with 4.8 of appendix D1, the result then being rounded off to the nearest hundredth (.01).
(4) Other useful measures of energy consumption for clothes dryers shall be those measures of energy consumption for clothes dryers which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions
(e)
(i) For a gas or oil water heater, the product of the annual energy consumption, determined according to section 6.1.8 or 6.2.5 of appendix E of this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of gas or oil, as appropriate, in dollars per Btu as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(ii) For an electric water heater, the product of the annual energy consumption, determined according to section 6.1.8 or 6.2.5 of appendix E of this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary, divided by 3412 Btu per kilowatt-hour, the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(2) The energy factor for the water heaters shall be—
(i) For a gas or oil water heater, as determined by section 6.1.7 or 6.2.4 of appendix E of this subpart rounded off to the nearest 0.01.
(ii) For an electric water heater, as determined by section 6.1.7 or 6.2.4 of appendix E of this subpart rounded off to the nearest 0.01.
(3) Other useful measures of energy consumption for water heaters shall be those measures of energy consumption for water heaters which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix E of this subpart.
(4) The alternative uniform test method for measuring the energy consumption of untested water heaters shall be that set forth in section 7.0 of appendix E of this subpart.
(f)
(i) The combined annual energy consumption for room air conditioners, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, as determined in accordance with paragraph (f)(4) of this section, and
(ii) A representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(2) The energy efficiency ratio for room air conditioners, expressed in Btus per watt-hour, shall be the quotient of:
(i) The cooling capacity in Btus per hour as determined in accordance with 5.1 of appendix F to this subpart divided by:
(ii) The electrical input power in watts as determined in accordance with 5.2 of appendix F to this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the nearest 0.1 Btu per watt-hour.
(3) The average annual energy consumption for room air conditioners, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, shall be determined by multiplying together the following two factors:
(i) Electrical input power in kilowatts as determined in accordance with 5.2 of appendix F to this subpart, and
(ii) The representative average-use cycle of 750 hours of compressor operation per year, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year.
(4) The combined annual energy consumption for room air conditioners, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, shall be the sum of:
(i) The average annual energy consumption as determined in accordance with paragraph (f)(4) of this section, and
(ii) The standby mode and off mode energy consumption, as determined in accordance with 5.3 of appendix F to this subpart, the resulting sum then being rounded off to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year.
(5) The combined energy efficiency ratio for room air conditioners, expressed in Btu's per watt-hour, shall be the quotient of:
(i) The cooling capacity in Btus per hour as determined in accordance with
(ii) The combined annual energy consumption as determined in accordance with paragraph (f)(4) of this section multiplied by a conversion factor of 1,000 to convert kilowatt-hours to watt-hours, the resulting quotient then being rounded off to the nearest 0.1 Btu per watt-hour.
(g)
(2) The estimated regional annual operating cost for primary electric heaters, shall be the product of: (i) The regional annual electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year for primary heaters determined according to section 3.2 of appendix G of this subpart and (ii) the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(3) The estimated operating cost per million Btu output shall be—
(i) For primary and supplementary electric heaters and unvented gas and oil heaters without an auxiliary electric system, the product of: (A) One million; and (B) the representative unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas, propane, or oil, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act as appropriate, or the quotient of the representative unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, divided by 3,412 Btu per kilowatt hour, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest 0.01 dollar per million Btu output; and
(ii) For unvented gas and oil heaters with an auxiliary electric system, the product of: (A) The quotient of one million divided by the rated output in Btu's per hour as determined in 3.4 of appendix G of this subpart; and (B) the sum of: (
(4) The rated output for unvented heaters is the rated output as determined according to either sections 3.3 or 3.4 of appendix G of this subpart, as appropriate, with the result being rounded to the nearest 100 Btu per hour.
(5) Other useful measures of energy consumption for unvented home heating equipment shall be those measures of energy consumption for unvented home heating equipment which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix G of this subpart.
(h) [Reserved]
(i)
(2) The cooking efficiency for conventional cooking tops and conventional ovens shall be the ratio of the cooking energy output for the test to the cooking energy input for the test, as determined according to 4.2.1 and 4.1.3, respectively, of appendix I to this subpart. The final cooking efficiency values shall be rounded off to three significant digits.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) The energy factor for conventional ranges, conventional cooking tops, and conventional ovens shall be the ratio of the annual useful cooking energy output to the total annual energy input, as determined according to 4.3, 4.2.3, 4.1.4, respectively, of appendix I to this subpart. The final energy factor values shall be rounded off to three significant digits.
(5) There shall be two estimated annual operating costs, two cooking efficiencies, and two energy factors for convertible cooking appliances—(i) an estimated annual operating cost, a cooking efficiency and an energy factor which represent values for those three measures of energy consumption for the operation of the appliance with natural gas; and (ii) an estimated annual operating cost, a cooking efficiency and an energy factor which represent values for those three measures of energy consumption for the operation of the appliance with LP-gas.
(6) The estimated annual operating cost for convertible cooking appliances which represents natural gas usage, as described in paragraph (i)(5)(i) of this section, shall be determined according to paragraph (i)(1) of this section using the total annual gas energy consumption for natural gas times the representative average unit cost for natural gas.
(7) The estimated annual operating cost for convertible cooking appliances which represents LP-gas usage, as described in paragraph (i)(5)(ii) of this section, shall be determined according to paragraph (i)(1) of this section using the representative average unit cost for propane times the total annual energy consumption of the test gas, either propane or natural gas.
(8) The cooking efficiency for convertible cooking appliances which represents natural gas usage, as described in paragraph (i)(5)(i) of this section, shall be determined according to paragraph (i)(2) of this section when the appliance is tested with natural gas.
(9) The cooking efficiency for convertible cooking appliances which represents LP-gas usage, as described in paragraph (i)(5)(ii) of this section, shall be determined according to paragraph (i)(2) of this section, when the appliance is tested with either natural gas or propane.
(10) The energy factor for convertible cooking appliances which represents natural gas usage, as described in paragraph (i)(5)(i) of this section, shall be determined according to paragraph (i)(4) of this section when the appliance is tested with natural gas.
(11) The energy factor for convertible cooking appliances which represents LP-gas usage, as described in paragraph (i)(5)(ii) of this section, shall be determined according to paragraph (i)(4) of this section when the appliance is tested with either natural gas or propane.
(12) Other useful measures of energy consumption for conventional ranges, conventional cooking tops, and conventional ovens shall be those measures of energy consumption which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix I to this subpart.
(13) The energy test procedure is designed to provide a measurement representative of average consumer use of the product, even if the test conditions and procedures may not be identical to average consumer use (
(j)
(i) When electrically heated water is used, the product of the following three factors:
(A) The representative average-use of 392 cycles per year,
(B) The total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle determined according to 4.1.6 of appendix J before appendix J1 becomes mandatory and 4.1.7 of appendix J1 when appendix J1 becomes mandatory, (see the note at the beginning of appendix J1), and
(C) The representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year, and
(ii) When gas-heated or oil-heated water is used, the product of: the representative average-use of 392 cycles per year and the sum of both:
(A) The product of the per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to 4.1.5 of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 to the subpart becomes mandatory or 4.1.6 of appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hours as provided by the Secretary, and
(B) The product of the per-cycle water energy consumption for gas-heated or oil-heated water in BTU per cycle, determined according to 4.1.4 of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 becomes mandatory or 4.1.4 of appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for oil or gas, as appropriate, as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(2)(i) The energy factor for automatic and semi-automatic clothes washers is determined in accordance with 4.5 of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 becomes mandatory or 4.5 of appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory. The result shall be rounded off to the nearest 0.01 cubic foot per kilowatt-hours.
(ii) The modified energy factor for automatic and semi-automatic clothes washers is determined in accordance with 4.4 of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 becomes mandatory or 4.4 of appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory. The result shall be rounded off to the nearest 0.01 cubic foot per kilowatt-hours.
(3) Other useful measures of energy consumption for automatic or semi-automatic clothes washers shall be those measures of energy consumption which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 becomes mandatory or appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory. In addition, the annual water consumption of a clothes washer can be determined by the product of:
(A) The representative average-use of 392 cycles per year, and
(B) The total weighted per-cycle water consumption in gallons per cycle determined according to 4.3.2 of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 becomes mandatory or 4.2.2 of appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory. The water consumption factor can be determined in accordance with 4.3.3 of appendix J before the date that appendix J1 becomes mandatory or 4.2.3 of appendix J1 upon the date that appendix J1 to this subpart becomes mandatory. The remaining moisture content can be
(k)-(l) [Reserved]
(m)
(i) For cooling-only units or the cooling portion of the estimated annual operating cost for air-source heat pumps which provide both heating and cooling, the product of:
(A) The quotient of the cooling capacity, in Btu's per hour, determined from the steady-state wet-coil test (A or A
(B) The representative average use cycle for cooling of 1,000 hours per year;
(C) A conversion factor of 0.001 kilowatt per watt; and
(D) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(ii) For air-source heat pumps which provide only heating or the heating portion of the estimated annual operating cost for air-source heat pumps which provide both heating and cooling, the product of:
(A) The quotient of the standardized design heating requirement, in Btu's per hour, nearest to the heating Region IV minimum design heating requirement, determined in section 4.2 of appendix M to this subpart, divided by the heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF), in Btu's per watt-hour, calculated for heating Region IV corresponding to the above-mentioned standardized design heating requirement and determined in section 4.2 of appendix M to this subpart;
(B) The representative average use cycle for heating of 2,080 hours per year;
(C) The adjustment factor of 0.77 which serves to adjust the calculated design heating requirement and heating load hours to the actual load experienced by a heating system;
(D) A conversion factor of 0.001 kilowatt per watt; and
(E) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(iii) For air-source heat pumps which provide both heating and cooling, the estimated annual operating cost is the sum of the quantity determined in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of this section added to the quantity determined in paragraph (m)(1)(ii) of this section.
(2) The estimated regional annual operating cost for cooling-only units and for air-source heat pumps shall be one of the following:
(i) For cooling-only units or the cooling portion of the estimated regional annual operating cost for air-source heat pumps which provide both heating and cooling, the product of:
(A) The quotient of the cooling capacity, in Btu's per hour, determined from the steady-state wet-coil test (A or A
(B) The estimated number of regional cooling load hours per year determined from Figure 3 in section 4.3 of appendix M to this subpart;
(C) A conversion factor of 0.001 kilowatts per watt; and
(D) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(ii) For air-source heat pumps which provide only heating or the heating portion of the estimated regional annual operating cost for air-source heat pumps which provide both heating and cooling, the product of:
(A) The estimated number of regional heating load hours per year determined
(B) The quotient of the standardized design heating requirement, in Btu's per hour, for the appropriate generalized climatic region of interest (
(C) The adjustment factor of 0.77 which serves to adjust the calculated design heating requirement and heating load hours to the actual load experienced by a heating system;
(D) A conversion factor of 0.001 kilowatts per watt; and
(E) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(iii) For air-source heat pumps which provide both heating and cooling, the estimated regional annual operating cost is the sum of the quantity determined in paragraph (m)(3)(i) of this section added to the quantity determined in paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of this section.
(3) The measure(s) of efficiency of performance for cooling-only units and air-source heat pumps shall be one or more of the following:
(i) The cooling mode efficiency measure for cooling-only units and air-source heat pumps which provide cooling shall be the seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER), in Btu's per watt-hour, determined according to section 4.1 of appendix M to this subpart, rounded off to the nearest 0.05.
(ii) The heating mode efficiency measure for air-source heat pumps shall be the heating seasonal performance factors (HSPF), in Btu's per watt-hour, determined according to section 4.2 of appendix M to this subpart for each applicable standardized design heating requirement within each climatic region, rounded off to the nearest 0.05.
(iii) The annual efficiency measure for air-source heat pumps which provide heating and cooling, shall be the annual performance factors (APF), in Btu's per watt-hour, determined according to section 4.3 of appendix M to this subpart for each standardized design heating requirement within each climatic region, rounded off to the nearest 0.05.
(4) The average off mode power consumption for central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps shall be determined according to appendix M of this subpart. Round the average off mode power consumption to the nearest watt.
(5) Other useful measures of energy consumption for central air conditioners shall be those measures of energy consumption which the Secretary of Energy determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix M to this subpart.
(6) All measures of energy consumption must be determined by the test method as set forth in appendix M to this subpart; or by an alternative rating method set forth in § 430.24(m)(4) as approved by the Assistant Secretary for Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy in accordance with § 430.24(m)(5).
(n)
(2) The annual fuel utilization efficiency for furnaces, expressed in percent, is the ratio of the annual fuel output of useful energy delivered to the heated space to the annual fuel energy input to the furnace determined according to section 10.1 of appendix N of this subpart for gas and oil furnaces and determined in accordance with section 11.1 of the American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ANSI/ASHRAE) Standard 103-1993 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) for electric furnaces. Round the annual fuel utilization efficiency to the nearest whole percentage point.
(3) The estimated regional annual operating cost for furnaces is the sum of: (i) The product of the regional annual fuel energy consumption in Btu's per year for gas or oil furnaces or in kilowatt-hours per year for electric furnaces, determined according to section 10.5.1 or 10.5.3 of appendix N of this subpart, respectively, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for gas or oil, or dollars per kilowatt-hour for electric, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, plus (ii) the product of the regional annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year, determined according to section 10.5.2 of appendix N of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting sum then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(4) The energy factor for furnaces, expressed in percent, is the ratio of annual fuel output of useful energy delivered to the heated space to the total annual energy input to the furnace determined according to section 10.4 of appendix N of this subpart.
(5) The average standby mode and off mode electrical power consumption for furnaces shall be determined according to section 8.6 of appendix N of this subpart. Round the average standby mode and off mode electrical power consumption to the nearest watt.
(6) Other useful measures of energy consumption for furnaces shall be those measures of energy consumption which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix N of this subpart.
(o)
(2) The estimated annual operating cost for vented home heating equipment is the sum of: (i) The product of the average annual fuel energy consumption, in Btu's per year for natural gas, propane, or oil fueled vented home heating equipment, determined according to section 4.6.2 of appendix O of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas, propane, or oil, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act; plus (ii) The product of the average annual auxiliary electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year determined according to section 4.6.3 of appendix O of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hours as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting sum then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(3) The estimated operating cost per million Btu output for gas or oil vented home heating equipment with an auxiliary electric system shall be the product of: (A) The quotient of one million
(4) Other useful measures of energy consumption for vented home heating equipment shall be those measures of energy consumption which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix O of this subpart.
(p)
(i) The product of the average annual fuel energy consumption, in Btu's per year, of natural gas or oil fueled pool heaters, determined according to section 4.2 of appendix P of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas or oil, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act; plus
(ii) The product of the average annual auxiliary electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year determined according to section 4.3 of appendix P of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hours as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting sum then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(2) The thermal efficiency of pool heaters, expressed as a percent, shall be determined in accordance with section 4 of appendix P to this subpart.
(q)
(i) The input power in kilowatts as determined in accordance with section 3.1.3.1 of appendix Q to this subpart; and
(ii) The representative average use cycle of 1,000 hours per year, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year.
(2) Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) shall be as determined in section 4.2 of appendix Q of this subpart.
(3) The Estimated Annual Operating Cost (EAOC) for fluorescent lamp ballasts, expressed in dollars per year, shall be the product of:
(i) The representative average unit energy cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary,
(ii) The representative average use cycle of 1,000 hours per year, and
(iii) The input power in kilowatts as determined in accordance with section 3.1.3.1 of appendix Q to this subpart, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year.
(4) Standby power consumption of certain fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be measured in accordance with section 3.2 of appendix Q to this subpart.
(r)
(2) The lamp efficacy for general service fluorescent lamps shall be equal to the average lumen output divided by the average lamp wattage as determined in section 4 of appendix R of this subpart, with the resulting quotient rounded off to the nearest tenth of a lumen per watt.
(3) The lamp efficacy for general service incandescent lamps shall be equal to the average lumen output divided by the average lamp wattage as determined in section 4 of appendix R of this subpart, with the resulting quotient rounded off to the nearest tenth of a lumen per watt.
(4) The lamp efficacy for incandescent reflector lamps shall be equal to the average lumen output divided by the average lamp wattage as determined in section 4 of appendix R of this subpart, with the resulting quotient rounded off to the nearest tenth of a lumen per watt.
(5) The color rendering index of a general service fluorescent lamp shall be tested and determined in accordance with section 4.4 of appendix R of this subpart and rounded off to the nearest unit.
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(aa)
(bb)
For
Testing for fluorescent lamp ballasts performed in accordance with appendix Q1 to this subpart shall comply with this section § 430.25. The testing for general service fluorescent lamps, general service incandescent lamps, and incandescent reflector lamps shall be performed in accordance with appendix R to this subpart. The testing for medium base compact fluorescent lamps shall be performed in accordance with appendix W of this subpart. This testing shall be conducted by test laboratories accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or by an accrediting organization recognized by NVLAP. NVLAP is a program of the National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce. NVLAP standards for accreditation of laboratories that test for compliance with standards for fluorescent lamp ballast luminous efficiency (BLE), lamp efficacy, and CRI are set forth in 15 CFR part 285. A manufacturer's or importer's own laboratory, if accredited, may conduct the applicable testing. Testing for BLE may also be conducted by laboratories accredited by Underwriters Laboratories or Council of Canada. Testing for fluorescent lamp ballasts performed in accordance with appendix Q to this subpart is not required to be conducted by test laboratories accredited by NVLAP or an accrediting organization recognized by NVLAP.
(a)(1) Any interested person may submit a petition to waive for a particular basic model any requirements of § 430.23, or of any appendix to this subpart, upon the grounds that the basic model contains one or more design characteristics which either prevent testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures, or the prescribed test procedures may evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy consumption characteristics, or water consumption characteristics (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data.
(2) Any interested person who has submitted a Petition for Waiver as provided in this subpart may also file an Application for Interim Waiver of the applicable test procedure requirements.
(b)(1) A Petition for Waiver shall be submitted either electronically to
(2) An Application for Interim Waiver shall be submitted in triplicate, with the required three copies of the Petition for Waiver, to the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, U.S. Department of Energy. Each Application for Interim Waiver shall reference the Petition for Waiver by identifying the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver and temporary exception are being sought. Each Application for Interim Waiver shall demonstrate likely success of the Petition for Waiver and shall address what economic hardship and/or competitive disadvantage is likely to result absent a favorable determination on the Application for Interim Waiver. Each Application for Interim Waiver shall be signed by the applicant or by an authorized representative.
(c)(1) Each petitioner, after filing a Petition for Waiver with DOE, and after the Petition for Waiver has been published in the
(2) Each applicant for Interim Waiver, whether filing jointly with, or subsequent to, a Petition for Waiver with DOE, shall concurrently notify in writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed units of the same product type (as listed in Section 322(a) of the Act) and shall include in the notice a copy of the Petition for Waiver and a copy of the Application for Interim Waiver. In complying with this section, each applicant shall in the written notification include a statement that the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy will receive and consider timely written comments on the Application for Interim Waiver. Each applicant, upon filing an Application for Interim Waiver, shall in complying with the requirements of this paragraph certify to DOE that a copy of these documents have been sent to all known manufacturers of domestically marked units of the same product type (as listed in section 322(a) of the Act). Such certification shall include the names and addresses of such persons. Each applicant also shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section with respect to the petition for waiver.
(d) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to an Application for Interim Waiver shall also send a copy of the comments to the applicant.
(e) If administratively feasible, applicant shall be notified in writing of the disposition of the Application for Interim Waiver within 15 business days of receipt of the application. Notice of DOE's determination on the Application for Interim Waiver shall be published in the
(f) The filing of an Application for Interim Waiver shall not constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this subpart, until an Interim Waiver has been granted.
(g) An Interim Waiver from test procedure requirements will be granted by the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy if it is determined that the applicant will experience economic hardship if the Application for Interim Waiver is denied, if it appears likely that the Petition for Waiver will be granted, and/or the Assistant Secretary determines that it would be desirable for public policy reasons to grant immediate relief pending a determination on the Petition for Waiver.
(h) An interim waiver will terminate 180 days after issuance or upon the determination on the Petition for Waiver, whichever occurs first. An interim waiver may be extended by DOE for 180 days. Notice of such extension and/or any modification of the terms or duration of the interim waiver shall be published in the
(i) Following publication of the Petition for Waiver in the
(j) The petitioner shall be notified in writing as soon as practicable of the disposition of each Petition for Waiver. The Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy shall issue a decision on the petition as soon as is practicable following receipt and review of the Petition for Waiver and other applicable documents, including, but not limited to, comments and rebuttal statements.
(k) The filing of a Petition for Waiver shall not constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this subpart, until a waiver or interim waiver has been granted.
(l) Waivers will be granted by the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, if it is determined
(m) Within one year of the granting of any waiver, the Department of Energy will publish in the
(n) In order to exhaust administrative remedies, any person aggrieved by an action under this section must file an appeal with the DOE's Office of Hearings and Appeals as provided in 10 CFR part 1003, subpart C.
The provisions of appendix A shall apply to all products manufactured on or after the effective date of any amended standards promulgated by DOE pursuant to Section 325(b)(4) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, as amended by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (to be codified at 42 U.S.C. 6295(b)(4)).
Section 3,
1.1“Adjusted total volume” means the sum of:
(i) The fresh food compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) in cubic feet, and
(ii) The product of an adjustment factor and the net freezer compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-2008 in cubic feet.
1.2“All-refrigerator” means an electric refrigerator that does not include a compartment for the freezing and long time storage of food at temperatures below 32 °F (0.0 °C). It may include a compartment of 0.50 cubic-foot capacity (14.2 liters) or less for the freezing and storage of ice.
1.3“Anti-sweat heater” means a device incorporated into the design of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on the exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.4“Anti-sweat heater switch” means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.5“Automatic defrost” means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of the defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.6“Automatic icemaker” means a device, that can be supplied with water without user intervention, either from a pressurized water supply system or by transfer from a water reservoir located inside the cabinet, that automatically produces, harvests, and stores ice in a storage bin, with means to automatically interrupt the harvesting operation when the ice storage bin is filled to a pre-determined level.
1.7“Cycle” means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer is calculated as though the consumer activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperatures (see section 3.2).
1.8“Cycle type” means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer for a period of 24 hours, with the consumer activated controls other than those that control compartment temperatures set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.9“Defrost cycle type” means a distinct sequence of control whose function is to remove frost and/or ice from a refrigerated surface. There may be variations in the defrost control sequence such as the number of defrost heaters energized. Each such variation establishes a separate distinct defrost cycle type. However, defrost achieved regularly during the compressor off-cycles by warming of the evaporator without active heat addition is not a defrost cycle type.
1.10“Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer” means an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer that has an enclosed condenser or an enclosed condenser/compressor compartment and a set of air ducts for transferring the exterior air from outside the building envelope into, through, and out of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer cabinet; is capable of mixing exterior air with the room air before discharging into, through, and out of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment; may include thermostatically controlled dampers or controls that mix the exterior and room air at low outdoor temperatures and exclude exterior air when the outdoor air temperature is above 80 °F (26.7 °C) or the room air temperature; and may have a thermostatically actuated exterior air fan.
1.11“HRF-1-2008” means AHAM Standard HRF-1-2008, Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances (2008), including Errata to Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, Correction Sheet issued November 17, 2009. Only sections of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-2008.
1.12“Long-time automatic defrost” means an automatic defrost system whose successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor operating time.
1.13“Separate auxiliary compartment” means a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer having more than two compartments that is not the first freezer compartment or the first fresh food compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary compartments may be convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer). Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment and separate auxiliary fresh food compartments may not be larger than the first fresh food compartment, but such size restrictions do not apply to separate auxiliary convertible compartments.
1.14“Special compartment” means any compartment other than a butter conditioner, without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control (such as crispers convertible to meat keepers) that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.15“Stabilization period” means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.16“Standard cycle” means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater control, when provided, is set in the highest energy-consuming position.
1.17“Variable anti-sweat heater control” means an anti-sweat heater control that varies the average power input of the anti-sweat heater(s) based on operating condition variable(s) and/or ambient condition variable(s).
1.18“Variable defrost control” means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2.1Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 ± 1 °F (32.2 ± 0.6 °C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.2Operational Conditions. The electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-2008, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 5.3 through section 5.5.5.5 (excluding section 5.5.5.4). Exceptions and clarifications to the cited sections of HRF-1-2008 are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.8, and 5.1 of this test procedure.
2.3Anti-Sweat Heaters. The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric refrigerator-freezer equipped with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.3.
2.4Conditions for Automatic Defrost Refrigerator-Freezers. For automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers, the freezer compartments shall not be loaded with any frozen food packages during testing. Cylindrical metallic masses of dimensions 1.12 ± 0.25
2.5Conditions for All-Refrigerators. There shall be no load in the freezer compartment during the test.
2.6The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as described in section 2.8 of this appendix;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 5.5.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 below. Settings for convertible compartments and other temperature-controllable or special compartments shall be as described in section 2.7 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing;
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use; and
(g) Ice storage bins shall be emptied of ice.
For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.7Compartments that are convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer) shall be operated in the highest energy use position. For the special case of convertible separate auxiliary compartments, this means that the compartment shall be treated as a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment, depending on which of these represents higher energy use. Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. However, for special compartments in which temperature control is achieved using the addition of heat (including resistive electric heating, refrigeration system waste heat, or heat from any other source, but excluding the transfer of air from another part of the interior of the product) for any part of the controllable temperature range of that compartment, the product energy use shall be determined by averaging two sets of tests. The first set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their coldest settings, and the second set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their warmest settings. The requirements for the warmest or coldest temperature settings of this section do not apply to features or functions associated with temperature control (such as fast chill compartments) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.8The space between the back of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. However, the clearance shall not be greater than 2 inches (51 mm) from the plane of the cabinet's back panel to the vertical surface. If permanent rear spacers extend further than this distance, the appliance shall be located with the spacers in contact with the vertical surface.
2.9Steady-State Condition. Steady-state conditions exist if the temperature measurements in all measured compartments taken at 4-minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 °F (0.023 °C) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B, described below.
A. The average of the measurements during a 2-hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours is compared to the average over an equivalent time period with 3 hours elapsing between the two measurement periods.
B. If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours and including the last complete cycle before a defrost period (or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last 2 hours before a defrost period) are compared to the same averaging period before the following defrost period.
2.10Exterior Air for Externally Vented Refrigerator or Refrigerator-Freezer. An exterior air source shall be provided with adjustable temperature and pressure capabilities. The exterior air temperature shall be adjustable from 30 ± 1 °F (1.7 ± 0.6 °C) to 90 ± 1 °F (32.2 ± 0.6 °C).
2.10.1Air Duct. The exterior air shall pass from the exterior air source to the test unit through an insulated air duct.
2.10.2Air Temperature Measurement. The air temperature entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment shall be maintained to ± 3 °F (1.7 °C) during the stabilization and test periods and shall be measured at the inlet point of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment (“condenser inlet”). Temperature measurements shall be taken from at least three temperature sensors or one sensor per 4 square inches (25.8 square cm) of the air duct cross-sectional area, whichever is greater, and shall be averaged. For a unit that has a condenser air fan, a minimum of three temperature sensors at the condenser fan discharge shall be required. Temperature sensors shall be arranged to be at the centers of equally divided cross-sectional areas. The exterior air temperature, at its source, shall be measured and maintained to ± 1 °F (0.6 °C) during the test period. The temperature measuring devices shall have an error no greater than ± 0.5 °F (± 0.3 °C). Measurements of the air temperature during the test period shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed 4 minutes.
2.10.3Exterior Air Static Pressure. The exterior air static pressure at the inlet point of the unit shall be adjusted to maintain a negative pressure of 0.20″ ± 0.05″ water column (62 Pascals ± 12.5 Pascals) for all air flow rates supplied to the unit. The pressure sensor shall be located on a straight duct with a distance of at least 7.5 times the diameter of the duct upstream and a distance of at least 3 times the diameter of the duct downstream. There shall be four static pressure taps at 90° angles apart. The four pressures shall be averaged by interconnecting the four pressure taps. The air pressure measuring instrument shall have an error no greater than 0.01” water column (2.5 Pascals).
3.1Model with no User Operable Temperature Control. A test shall be performed to measure the compartment temperatures and energy use. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously.
3.2Models with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the following standardized temperatures:
All-Refrigerator: 39 °F (3.9 °C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator: 15 °F (−9.4 °C) freezer compartment temperature, 39 °F (3.9 °C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator-Freezer: 0 °F (−17.8 °C) freezer compartment temperature, 39 °F (3.9 °C) fresh food compartment temperature.
For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.4, and the fresh food compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.3.
3.2.1A first test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest settings. For mechanical control systems, knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings—if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. A second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting or all controls set at their coldest setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed). For all-refrigerators, this setting shall be the appropriate setting that attempts to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized temperature for all-refrigerators. For refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers, the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their coldest setting, unless all compartment temperatures measured during the first part of the test are lower than the standardized temperatures, in which case the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their warmest setting. Refer to Table 1 for all-refrigerators or Table 2 for refrigerators with freezer compartments and refrigerator-freezers to determine which test results to use in the energy consumption calculation. If any compartment is warmer than its standardized temperature for a test with all controls at their coldest position, the tested unit fails the test and cannot be rated.
3.2.2Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If all compartment temperatures are below the appropriate standardized temperatures, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1.
3.2.3Temperature Settings for Separate Auxiliary Convertible Compartments. For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as freezer compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 °F (1.1 °C) of the standardized temperature, and the warmest setting shall be above 5 °F (−15 °C). For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as fresh food compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 °F (1.1 °C) of the standardized temperature, and the coldest setting shall be below 34 °F (1.1 °C). For compartments where control settings are not expressed as particular temperatures, the measured temperature of the convertible compartment rather than the settings shall meet the specified criteria.
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2, and using the control settings set forth in section 3.
4.1Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be no less than 3 hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. (A compressor cycle is a complete “on” and a complete “off” period of the motor). If no “off” cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the test period shall be 3 hours. If incomplete cycling occurs (i.e. less than two compressor cycles during a 24-hour period), the results of the 24-hour period shall be used.
4.2Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternative provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of section 4.2.2 shall apply. If the model has a dual compressor system with automatic defrost for both systems, the provisions of 4.2.3 shall apply. If the model being tested has long-time automatic or variable defrost control involving multiple defrost cycle types, such as for a product with a single compressor and two or more evaporators in which the evaporators are defrosted at different frequencies, the provisions of section 4.2.4 shall apply. If the model being tested has multiple defrost cycle types for which compressor run time between defrosts is a fixed time of less than 14 hours for all such cycle types, and for which the compressor run time between defrosts for different defrost cycle types are equal to or multiples of each other, the test time period shall be
4.2.1Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the two-part test described in this section may be used. The first part is a stable period of compressor operation that includes no portions of the defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, that is otherwise the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part is designed to capture the energy consumed during all of the events occurring with the defrost control sequence that are outside of stable operation.
4.2.1.1Cycling Compressor System. For a system with a cycling compressor, the second part starts at the termination of the last regular compressor “on” cycle. The average temperature of the compartment measured from the termination of the previous compressor “on” cycle to the termination of the last regular compressor “on” cycle must be within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. If any compressor cycles occur prior to the defrost heater being energized that cause the average temperature in the compartment to deviate from the first part temperature by more than 0.5 °F (0.3 °C), these compressor cycles are not considered regular compressor cycles and must be included in the second part of the test. As an example, a “precool” cycle, which is an extended compressor cycle that lowers the compartment temperature prior to energizing the defrost heater, must be included in the second part of the test. The test period for the second part of the test ends at the initiation of the first regular compressor cycle after the compartment temperatures have fully recovered to their stable conditions. The average temperature of the compartment measured from this initiation of the first regular compressor “on” cycle until the initiation of the next regular compressor “on” cycle must be within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part of the test may be terminated after 4 hours if the above conditions cannot be met. See Figure 1.
4.2.1.2Non-cycling Compressor System. For a system with a non-cycling compressor, the second part starts at a time before defrost during stable operation when the compartment temperature is within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part stops at a time after defrost during stable operation when the compartment temperature is within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part of the test may be terminated after 4 hours if the above conditions cannot be met.
4.2.2Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
4.2.3Dual Compressor Systems with Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has separate compressor systems for the refrigerator and freezer sections, each with its own automatic defrost system, then the two-part method in 4.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method will be conducted separately for each automatic defrost system. The components (compressor, fan motors, defrost heaters, anti-sweat heaters, etc.) associated with each system will be identified and their energy consumption will be separately measured during each test.
4.2.4Systems with Multiple Defrost Frequencies. This section applies to models with long-time automatic or variable defrost control with multiple defrost cycle types, such as models with single compressors and multiple evaporators in which the evaporators have different defrost frequencies. The two-part method in 4.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method will be conducted separately for each distinct defrost cycle type. For defrost cycle types involving the defrosting of both fresh food and freezer compartments, the freezer compartment temperature shall be used to determine test period start and stop times.
5.1Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figures 5.1 and 5.2 of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference;
If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with those shown in Figure 5.1 and 5.2 of HRF-1-2008, the product may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to
5.1.1Measured Temperature. The measured temperature of a compartment is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken in that compartment at a particular point in time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed 4 minutes.
5.1.2Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during the test period as defined in section 4. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.1. For models with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.2.
5.1.3Fresh Food Compartment Temperature. The fresh food compartment temperature shall be calculated as:
5.1.4Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartment temperature shall be calculated as:
5.2Energy Measurements
5.2.1Per-Day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day, ET, for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4 adjusted to a 24-hour period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows.
5.2.1.1Nonautomatic and Automatic Defrost Models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.2Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two-part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.3Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.4Dual Compressor Systems with Dual Automatic Defrost. The two-part test method in section 4.2.4 must be used, and the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.5Long-time or Variable Defrost Control for Systems with Multiple Defrost cycle Types. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.3 Volume Measurements. The electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-2008, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 3.30 and sections 4.2 through 4.3, and be calculated equivalent to:
In the case of refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers with automatic icemakers, the volume occupied by the automatic icemaker, including its ice storage bin, is to be included in the volume measurement.
5.4Externally Vented Refrigerator or Refrigerator-Freezer Units. All test measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be made in accordance with the requirements of other sections of this appendix, except as modified in this section or other sections expressly applicable to externally vented refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers.
5.4.1Operability of “Thermostatic” and “Mixing of Air” Controls. Before conducting energy consumption tests, the operability of thermostatic controls that permit the mixing of exterior and ambient air when exterior air temperatures are less than 60 °F (15.6 °C) must be verified. The operability of such controls shall be verified by operating the unit under ambient air temperature of 90 °F (32.2 °C) and exterior air temperature of 45 °F (7.2 °C). If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment is maintained at 60 ± 3 °F (15.6 ± 1.7 °C), energy consumption of the unit shall be measured under 5.4.2.2 and 5.4.2.3. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment is not maintained at 60 ± 3 °F (15.6 ± 1.7 °C), energy consumption of the unit shall also be measured under 5.4.2.4.
5.4.2Energy Consumption Tests.
5.4.2.1Correction Factor Test. To enable calculation of a correction factor, K, two full cycle tests shall be conducted to measure energy consumption of the unit with air mixing controls disabled and the condenser inlet air temperatures set at 90 °F (32.2 °C) and 80 °F (26.7 °C). Both tests shall be conducted with all compartment temperature controls set at the position midway between their warmest and coldest settings and the anti-sweat heater switch off. Record the energy consumptions ec
5.4.2.2Energy Consumption at 90 °F. The unit shall be tested at 90 °F (32.2 °C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e
5.4.2.3Energy Consumption at 60 °F. The unit shall be tested at 60 °F (26.7 °C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e
5.4.2.4Energy Consumption if Mixing Controls do not Operate Properly. If the operability of temperature and mixing controls has not been verified as required under 5.4.1, the unit shall be tested at 50 °F (10.0 °C) and 30 °F (-1.1 °C) exterior air temperatures to record the energy consumptions (e
6.1Adjusted Total Volume.
6.1.1Electric Refrigerators. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerators under test shall be defined as:
6.1.2Electric Refrigerator-Freezers. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerator-freezers under test shall be calculated as follows:
6.2Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption.
6.2.1All-Refrigerator Models. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type, E, is expressed in kilowatt-hours per
6.2.1.1If the fresh food compartment temperature is always below 39.0 °F (3.9 °C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.1.2If one of the fresh food compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 39.0 °F (3.9 °C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.2Refrigerators and Refrigerator-Freezers. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type, E, is expressed in kilowatt-hours per-cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall be defined in one of the following ways as applicable.
6.2.2.1If the fresh food compartment temperature is at or below 39 °F (3.9 °C) in both tests and the freezer compartment temperature is at or below 15 °F (-9.4 °C) in both tests of a refrigerator or at or below 0 °F (-17.8 °C) in both tests of a refrigerator-freezer, the per-cycle energy consumption shall be:
6.2.2.2If the conditions of 6.2.2.1 do not exist, the per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined by the higher of the two values calculated by the following two formulas:
6.2.3Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric refrigerator-freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (E
6.3Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezers. Per-cycle energy consumption measurements for an externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of this appendix, as modified in sections 6.3.1-6.3.7.
6.3.1Correction Factor. The correction factor, K, shall be calculated as:
6.3.2Combining Test Results of Different Settings of Compartment Temperature Controls. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, follow the calculation procedures of 6.2 to combine the test results for energy consumption of the unit at different temperature control settings for each condenser inlet air temperature tested under 5.4.2.2, 5.4.2.3, and 5.4.2.4, where applicable, (e
6.3.3Energy Consumption Corrections. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, adjust the energy consumptions
6.3.4Energy Profile Equation. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the energy consumption E
6.3.5Energy Consumption at 80 °F (26.7 °C), 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 65 °F (18.3 °C). For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the energy consumptions at 80 °F (26.7 °C), 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 65 °F (18.3 °C) exterior air temperatures, E
6.3.6National Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the national average energy consumption, E
6.3.7Regional Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption. If regional average per-cycle energy consumption is required to be calculated for a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the regional average per-cycle energy consumption, E
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27.
The provisions of appendix A1 shall apply to all products manufactured prior to the effective date of any amended standards promulgated by DOE pursuant to Section 325(b)(4) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, as amended by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (to be codified at 42 U.S.C. 6295(b)(4)).
Section 3,
1.1“Adjusted total volume” means the sum of (i) the fresh food compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, and (ii) the product of an adjustment factor and the net freezer compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-1979, in cubic feet.
1.2“All-refrigerator” means an electric refrigerator which does not include a compartment for the freezing and long time storage of food at temperatures below 32 °F (0.0 °C). It may include a compartment of 0.50 cubic feet capacity (14.2 liters) or less for the freezing and storage of ice.
1.3“Anti-sweat heater” means a device incorporated into the design of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.4“Anti-sweat heater switch” means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.5“Automatic defrost” means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically
1.6“Automatic icemaker” means a device that can be supplied with water without user intervention, either from a pressurized water supply system or by transfer from a water reservoir located inside the cabinet, that automatically produces, harvests, and stores ice in a storage bin, with means to automatically interrupt the harvesting operation when the ice storage bin is filled to a pre-determined level.
1.7“Cycle” means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer is calculated as though the consumer activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperatures (see section 3.2).
1.8“Cycle type” means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer for a period of 24 hours, with the consumer activated controls other than those that control compartment temperatures set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.9“Defrost cycle type” means a distinct sequence of control whose function is to remove frost and/or ice from a refrigerated surface. There may be variations in the defrost control sequence such as the number of defrost heaters energized. Each such variation establishes a separate distinct defrost cycle type. However, defrost achieved regularly during the compressor off-cycles by warming of the evaporator without active heat addition is not a defrost cycle type.
1.10“Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer” means an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer that has an enclosed condenser or an enclosed condenser/compressor compartment and a set of air ducts for transferring the exterior air from outside the building envelope into, through, and out of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer cabinet; is capable of mixing exterior air with the room air before discharging into, through, and out of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment; may include thermostatically controlled dampers or controls that mix the exterior and room air at low outdoor temperatures and exclude exterior air when the outdoor air temperature is above 80 °F (26.7 °C) or the room air temperature; and may have a thermostatically actuated exterior air fan.
1.11“HRF-1-1979” means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination refrigerator-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B 38.1-1970. Only sections of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-1979.
1.12“Long-time Automatic Defrost” means an automatic defrost system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor-operating time.
1.13“Separate auxiliary compartment” means a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer having more than two compartments that is not the first freezer compartment or the first fresh food compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary compartments may be convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer). Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment and separate auxiliary fresh food compartments may not be larger than the first fresh food compartment, but such size restrictions do not apply to separate auxiliary convertible compartments.
1.14“Special compartment” means any compartment other than a butter conditioner, without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control (such as crispers convertible to meat keepers) that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.15“Stabilization Period” means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.16“Standard cycle” means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater control, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming position.
1.17“Variable anti-sweat heater control” means an anti-sweat heater control that varies the average power input of the anti-sweat heater(s) based on operating condition variable(s) and/or ambient condition variable(s).
1.18“Variable defrost control” means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost
2.1Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 ± 1 °F (32.2 ± 0.6 °C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.2Operational Conditions. The electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 7.2 through section 7.4.3.3, except that the vertical ambient temperature gradient at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. Unless the area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to be maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform to a height 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. Defrost controls are to be operative. Other exceptions and provisions to the cited sections of HRF-1-1979 are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.8, and 5.1 of this appendix.
2.3Anti-Sweat Heaters.
The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric refrigerator-freezer with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.3.
2.4Conditions for Automatic Defrost Refrigerator-Freezers. For automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers, the freezer compartments shall not be loaded with any frozen food packages during testing. Cylindrical metallic masses of dimensions 1.12 ± 0.25 inches (2.9 ± 0.6 cm) in diameter and height shall be attached in good thermal contact with each temperature sensor within the refrigerated compartments. All temperature measuring sensor masses shall be supported by low-thermal-conductivity supports in such a manner to ensure that there will be at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) of air space separating the thermal mass from contact with any interior surface or hardware inside the cabinet. In case of interference with hardware at the sensor locations specified in section 5.1, the sensors shall be placed at the nearest adjacent location such that there will be a 1-inch air space separating the sensor mass from the hardware.
2.5Conditions for all-refrigerators. There shall be no load in the freezer compartment during the test.
2.6The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as described in section 2.8 below;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) section 7.4.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 below. Settings for convertible compartments and other temperature-controllable or special compartments shall be as described in section 2.7 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing; and
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use.
2.7Compartments that are convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer) shall be operated in the highest energy use position. For the special case of convertible separate auxiliary compartments, this means that the compartment shall be treated as a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment, depending on which of these represents higher energy use. Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. This requirement for the coldest temperature does not apply to features or functions associated with temperature control (such as fast chill compartments) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.8The space between the back of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.9Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the temperature measurements in all measured compartments taken at four minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 °F. (0.023 °C.) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B.
A. The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compared to the average
B. If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a defrost period, or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last two hours prior to a defrost period; are compared to the same averaging period prior to the following defrost period.
2.10Exterior air for externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer. An exterior air source shall be provided with adjustable temperature and pressure capabilities. The exterior air temperature shall be adjustable from 35 ± 1 °F (1.7 ± 0.6 °C) to 90 ± 1 °F (32.2 ± 0.6 °C).
2.10.1Air duct. The exterior air shall pass from the exterior air source to the test unit through an insulated air duct.
2.10.2Air temperature measurement. The air temperature entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment shall be maintained to ± 3 °F (1.7 °C) during the stabilization and test periods and shall be measured at the inlet point of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment (“condenser inlet”). Temperature measurements shall be taken from at least three temperature sensors or one sensor per 4 square inches of the air duct cross sectional area, whichever is greater, and shall be averaged. For a unit that has a condenser air fan, a minimum of three temperature sensors at the condenser fan discharge shall be required. Temperature sensors shall be arranged to be at the centers of equally divided cross sectional areas. The exterior air temperature, at its source, shall be measured and maintained to ± 1 °F (0.6 °C) during the test period. The temperature measuring devices shall have an error not greater than ± 0.5 °F (± 0.3 °C). Measurements of the air temperature during the test period shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
2.10.3Exterior air static pressure. The exterior air static pressure at the inlet point of the unit shall be adjusted to maintain a negative pressure of 0.20″ ± 0.05″ water column (62 Pa ± 12.5 Pa) for all air flow rates supplied to the unit. The pressure sensor shall be located on a straight duct with a distance of at least 7.5 times the diameter of the duct upstream and a distance of at least 3 times the diameter of the duct downstream. There shall be four static pressure taps at 90°angles apart. The four pressures shall be averaged by interconnecting the four pressure taps. The air pressure measuring instrument shall have an error not greater than 0.01″ water column (2.5 Pa).
3.1Model with no user operable temperature control. A test shall be performed during which the compartment temperatures and energy use shall be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously.
3.2Model with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the standardized temperatures of:
All-Refrigerator: 38 °F (3.3 °C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator: 15 °F (−9.4 °C) freezer compartment temperature, 45 °F (7.2 °C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator-Freezer: 5 °F (−15 °C) freezer compartment temperature, 45 °F (7.2 °C) fresh food compartment temperature.
3.2.1A first test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest settings. For mechanical control systems, knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings—if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. A second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting or all controls set at their coldest setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed). For all-refrigerators, this setting shall be the appropriate setting that attempts to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized temperature for all-refrigerators. For refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers, the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their coldest setting, unless all compartment temperatures measured during the first part of the test are lower than the standardized temperatures, in which case the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their warmest setting. If (a) the measured temperature of any compartment with all controls set at their coldest settings is above its standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest settings and the result of this test
3.2.2Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the measured temperatures of all compartments for this test are below their standardized temperatures then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 of this appendix.
3.2.3Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the measured temperature of any compartment for this test is above its standardized temperature, a second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest settings and the result of this test shall be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at their coldest settings to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 of this appendix.
3.2.4Temperature Settings for Separate Auxiliary Convertible Compartments. For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as freezer compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 °F (1.1 °C) of the standardized temperature, and the warmest setting shall be above 10 °F (−12.2 °C). For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as fresh food compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 °F (1.1 °C) of the standardized temperature, and the coldest setting shall be below 40 °F (4.4 °C). For compartments where control settings are not expressed as particular temperatures, the measured temperature of the convertible compartment rather than the settings shall meet the specified criteria.
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2, and using the control settings set forth in section 3.
4.1Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be no less than 3 hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. (A compressor cycle is a complete “on” and a complete “off” period of the motor). If no “off” cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the test period shall be 3 hours. If incomplete cycling occurs (i.e. less than two compressor cycles during a 24-hour period), the results of the 24-hour period shall be used.
4.2Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternative provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of section 4.2.2 shall apply. If the model has a dual compressor system with automatic defrost for both systems, the provisions of 4.2.3 shall apply.
4.2.1Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the test time period may consist of two parts. The first part would be the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part would start when a defrost cycle is initiated when the compressor “on” cycle is terminated prior to start of the defrost heater and terminates at the second turn “on” of the compressor or 4 hours from the initiation of the defrost heater, whichever comes first. See diagram in Figure 1 to this section.
4.2.2Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
4.2.3Dual Compressor Systems with Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has separate compressor systems for the refrigerator and freezer sections, each with its own automatic defrost system, then the two-part method in 4.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method will be conducted separately for each automatic defrost system. The components (compressor, fan motors, defrost heaters, anti-sweat heaters, etc.) associated with each system will be identified and their energy consumption will be separately measured during each test.
5.1Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figures 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and shall be accurate to within ± 0.5 °F (0.3 °C). No freezer temperature measurements need be taken in an all-refrigerator model. If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with those shown in Figure 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979, the product may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the cabinet, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.14, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used.
5.1.1Measured Temperature. The measured temperature of a compartment is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken in that compartment at a particular time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
5.1.2Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during one or more complete compressor cycles. One compressor cycle is one complete motor “on” and one complete motor “off” period. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.1. For models with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.2.
5.1.2.1The number of complete compressor cycles over which the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of minutes between measured temperature readings, rounded up to the next whole minute or a number of complete compressor cycles over a time period exceeding 1 hour, whichever is greater. One of the compressor cycles shall be the last complete compressor cycle during the test period.
5.1.2.2If no compressor cycling occurs, the compartment temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last 32 minutes of the test period.
5.1.2.3If incomplete compressor cycling occurs, the compartment temperatures shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last three hours of the last complete compressor “on” period.
5.1.3Fresh Food Compartment Temperature. The fresh food compartment temperature shall be calculated as:
5.1.4Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartmenttemperature shall be calculated as:
5.2Energy Measurements
5.2.1Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4 adjusted to a 24-hour period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1Nonautomatic and Automatic Defrost Models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.2Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two-part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.3Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.4Dual Compressor Systems with Dual Automatic Defrost. The two-part test method in section 4.1.2.4 must be used, and the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.3Volume measurements. The electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and sections 4.2 through 4.3 and be calculated equivalent to:
5.4Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer units. All test measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be made in accordance with the requirements of other sections of this appendix, except as modified in this section 5.4 or other sections expressly applicable to externally vented refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers.
5.4.1Operability of thermostatic and mixing of air controls. Prior to conducting energy consumption tests, the operability of thermostatic controls that permit the mixing of exterior and ambient air when exterior air temperatures are less than 60 °F must be verified. The operability of such controls shall be verified by operating the unit under ambient air temperature of 90 °F and exterior air temperature of 45 °F. If the inlet air
5.4.2Energy consumption tests.
5.4.2.1Correction factor test. To enable calculation of a correction factor, K, two full cycle tests shall be conducted to measure energy consumption of the unit with air mixing controls disabled and the condenser inlet air temperatures set at 90 °F (32.2 °C) and 80 °F (26.7 °C). Both tests shall be conducted with all compartment temperature controls set at the position midway between their warmest and coldest settings and the anti-sweat heater switch off. Record the energy consumptions ec
5.4.2.2Energy consumption at 90 °F. The unit shall be tested at 90 °F (32.2 °C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e
5.4.2.3Energy consumption at 60 °F. The unit shall be tested at 60 °F (26.7 °C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e
5.4.2.4Energy consumption if mixing controls do not operate properly. If the operability of temperature and mixing controls has not been verified as required under 5.4.1, the unit shall be tested at 50 °F (10.0 °C) and 30 °F (−1.1 °C) exterior air temperatures to record the energy consumptions (e
6.1Adjusted Total Volume.
6.1.1Electric refrigerators. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerators under test shall be defined as:
6.1.2Electric refrigerator-freezers. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerator-freezers under test shall be calculated as follows:
6.2Average Per-Cycle Energy consumption.
6.2.1All-refrigerator Models. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the temperature attainable in the fresh food compartment as shown below.
6.2.1.1If the fresh food compartment temperature is always below 38.0 °F. (3.3 °C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.1.2If one of the fresh food compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 38.0 °F (3.3 °C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.2Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per-cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall be defined in the applicable following manner.
6.2.2.1If the fresh food compartment temperature is always at or below 45 °F. (7.2 °C.) in both of the tests and the freezer compartment temperature is always at or below 15 °F. (−9.4 °C.) in both tests of a refrigerator or at or below 5 °F. (−15 °C.) in both tests of a refrigerator-freezer, the per-cycle energy consumption shall be:
6.2.2.2If the conditions of 6.2.2.1 do not exist, the per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined by the higher of the two values calculated by the following two formulas:
6.2.3Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric refrigerator-freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (E
6.3Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezers. Per-cycle energy consumption measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of this appendix, as modified in sections 6.3.1-6.3.7.
6.3.1Correction factor. A correction factor, K, shall be calculated as:
6.3.2Combining test results of different settings of compartment temperature controls. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, follow the calculation procedures of 6.2 to combine the test results for energy consumption of the unit at different temperature control settings for each condenser inlet air temperature tested under 5.4.2.2, 5.4.2.3, and 5.4.2.4, where applicable, (e
6.3.3Energy consumption corrections. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the energy consumptions ε
6.3.4Energy profile equation. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the energy consumption E
6.3.5Energy consumption at 80 °F (26.7 °C), 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 65 °F (18.3 °C). For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the energy consumptions at 80 °F (26.7 °C), 75 °F (23.9 °C) and 65 °F (18.3 °C) exterior air temperatures, E
6.3.6National average per cycle energy consumption. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the national average energy consumption, E
6.3.7Regional average per cycle energy consumption. If regional average per cycle energy consumption is required to be calculated, for a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the regional average per cycle energy consumption, E
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27.
The provisions of appendix B shall apply to all products manufactured on or after the effective date of any amended standards promulgated by DOE pursuant to Section 325(b)(4) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, as amended by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (to be codified at 42 U.S.C. 6295(b)(4)).
Section 3,
1.1“Adjusted total volume” means the product of the freezer volume as defined in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) in cubic feet multiplied by an adjustment factor.
1.2“Anti-sweat heater” means a device incorporated into the design of a freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.3“Anti-sweat heater switch” means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.4“Automatic defrost” means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.5“Automatic icemaker” means a device that can be supplied with water without user intervention, either from a pressurized water supply system or by transfer from a water reservoir, that automatically produces, harvests, and stores ice in a storage bin, with means to automatically interrupt the harvesting operation when the ice storage bin is filled to a pre-determined level.
1.6“Cycle” means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of a freezer is calculated as though the consumer-activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperature (see section 3.2).
1.7“Cycle type” means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating a freezer for a period of 24 hours with the consumer-activated controls other than the compartment temperature control set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.8“HRF-1-2008” means AHAM Standard HRF-1-2008, Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances (2008), including Errata to Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, Correction Sheet issued November 17, 2009. Only sections of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-2008.
1.9“Long-time automatic defrost” means an automatic defrost system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor operating time.
1.10“Quick freeze” means an optional feature on freezers that is initiated manually. It bypasses the thermostat control and operates continually until the feature is terminated either manually or automatically.
1.11“Separate auxiliary compartment” means a freezer compartment other than the first freezer compartment of a freezer having more than one compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment.
1.12“Special compartment” means any compartment without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.13“Stabilization period” means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.14“Standard cycle” means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater switch, when provided, is set in the highest energy-consuming position.
1.15 “Variable defrost control” means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2.1Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 ± 1.0 °F (32.2 ± 0.6 °C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.2Operational Conditions. The freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-2008, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), sections 5.3 through section 5.5.5.5 (but excluding sections 5.5.5.2 and 5.5.5.4). The quick freeze option shall be switched off except as specified in section 3.1. Additional clarifications are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.6.
2.3Anti-Sweat Heaters. The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric freezer with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.2.
2.4The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as described in section 2.6 below;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) section 5.5.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 of this appendix. Settings for special compartments shall be as described in section 2.5 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing;
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use; and
(g) Ice storage bins shall be emptied of ice.
For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.5Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. However, for special compartments in which temperature control is achieved using the addition of heat (including resistive electric heating, refrigeration system waste heat, or heat from any other source, but excluding the transfer of air from another part of the interior of the product) for any part of the controllable temperature range of that compartment, the product energy use shall be determined by averaging two sets of tests. The first set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their coldest settings, and the second set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their warmest settings. The requirements for the warmest or coldest temperature settings of this section do not apply to features or functions associated with temperature control (such as quick freeze) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.6The space between the back of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. However, the clearance shall not be greater than 2 inches (51 mm) from the plane of the cabinet's back panel to the vertical surface. If permanent rear spacers extend further than this distance, the appliance shall be located with the spacers in contact with the vertical surface.
2.7Steady State Condition. Steady-state conditions exist if the temperature measurements taken at 4-minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 °F (0.023 °C) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B described below.
A—The average of the measurements during a 2-hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours is compared to the average over an equivalent time period with 3 hours elapsing between the two measurement periods.
B—If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours and including the last complete cycle before a defrost period (or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last 2 hours before a defrost period) are compared to the same averaging period before the following defrost period.
3.1Model with No User Operable Temperature Control. A test shall be performed during which the compartment temperature and energy use shall be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously. If the model has the quick freeze option, this option must be used to bypass the temperature control.
3.2Model with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the standardized temperature of 0.0 °F (−17.8 °C).
3.2.1A first test shall be performed with all temperature controls set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest settings. For mechanical control systems, knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings—if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. A second test shall be performed with all controls set at either their warmest or their coldest setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed), whichever is appropriate, to attempt to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two tests which bound (
3.2.2Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment temperature is below the standardized temperature, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with section 3.2.1.
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2 and using the control settings as set forth in section 3 above.
4.1Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be no less than 3 hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. (A compressor cycle is a complete “on” and a complete “off” period of the motor.) If no “off” cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the test period shall be 3 hours. If incomplete cycling occurs (less than two compressor cycles during a 24-hour period), the results of the 24-hour period shall be used.
4.2Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternate provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of 4.2.2 shall apply.
4.2.1Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the two-part test described in this section may be used. The first part is a stable period of compressor operation that includes no portions of the defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, that is otherwise the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part is designed to capture the energy consumed during all of the events occurring with the defrost control sequence that are outside of stable operation.
4.2.1.1Cycling Compressor System. For a system with a cycling compressor, the second part starts at the termination of the last regular compressor “on” cycle. The average temperature of the compartment measured from the termination of the previous compressor “on” cycle to the termination of the last regular compressor “on” cycle must be within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. If any compressor cycles occur prior to the defrost heater being energized that cause the average temperature in the compartment to deviate from the first part temperature by more than 0.5 °F (0.3 °C), these compressor cycles are not considered regular compressor cycles and must be included in the second part of the test. As an example, a “precool” cycle, which is an extended compressor cycle that lowers the compartment temperature prior to energizing the defrost heater, must be included in the second part of the test. The test period for the second part of the test ends at the initiation of the first regular compressor cycle after the compartment temperatures have fully recovered to their stable conditions. The average temperature of the compartment measured from this initiation of the first regular compressor “on” cycle until the initiation of the next regular compressor “on” cycle must be within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part of the test may be terminated after 4 hours if the above conditions cannot be met. See Figure 1.
4.2.1.2Non-cycling Compressor System. For a system with a non-cycling compressor, the second part starts at a time before defrost during stable operation when the compartment temperature is within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part stops at a time after defrost during stable operation when the compartment temperature is within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part of the test may be terminated after 4 hours if the above conditions cannot be met. See Figure 2.
4.2.2Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
5.1Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figure 5-2 of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference;
If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with those shown in Figure 5.2 of HRF-1-2008, the product may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the cabinet, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.14, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used.
5.1.1Measured Temperature. The measured temperature is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken at a particular point in time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed 4 minutes.
5.1.2Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken during the test period as defined in section 4. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.1. For models with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.2.
5.1.3Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartment temperature shall be calculated as:
5.2Energy Measurements:
5.2.1Per-Day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4 adjusted to a 24-hour period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1Nonautomatic and Automatic Defrost Models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.2Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two-part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.3Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.3Volume Measurements. The total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in
In the case of freezers with automatic icemakers, the volume occupied by the automatic icemaker, including its ice storage bin, is to be included in the volume measurement.
6.1Adjusted Total Volume. The adjusted total volume, VA, for freezers under test shall be defined as:
6.2Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption
6.2.1The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend on the compartment temperature attainable as shown below.
6.2.1.1If the compartment temperature is always below 0.0 °F (−17.8 °C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.1.2If one of the compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 0.0 °F (17.8 °C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.2Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (E
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27.
The provisions of appendix B1 shall apply to all products manufactured prior to the effective date of any amended standards promulgated by DOE pursuant to Section 325(b)(4) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, as amended by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (to be codified at 42 U.S.C. 6295(b)(4)).
Section 3,
1.1Adjusted total volume” means the product of, (1) the freezer volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, times (2) an adjustment factor.
1.2“Anti-sweat heater” means a device incorporated into the design of a freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.3“Anti-sweat heater switch” means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.4“Automatic Defrost” means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.5“Cycle” means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of a freezer is calculated as though the consumer-activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperature (see section 3.2).
1.6“Cycle type” means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating a freezer for a period of 24 hours with the consumer-activated controls other than the compartment temperature control set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.7“HRF-1-1979” means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination refrigerator-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B 38.1-1970. Only sections of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-1979.
1.8“Long-time Automatic Defrost” means an automatic defrost system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor-operating time.
1.9“Quick freeze” means an optional feature on freezers that is initiated manually. It bypasses the thermostat control and operates continually until the feature is terminated either manually or automatically.
1.10“Separate auxiliary compartment” means a freezer compartment other than the first freezer compartment of a freezer having more than one compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment.
1.11“Special compartment” means any compartment without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.12“Stabilization Period” means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.13“Standard cycle” means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater switch, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming position.
1.14“Variable defrost control” means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2.1Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 ± 1.0 °F (32.2 ± 0.6 °C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.2Operational Conditions. The freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 7.2 through section 7.4.3.3 (but excluding section 7.4.3.2), except that the vertical ambient gradient at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. Unless the area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to be maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform to a height 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. Defrost controls are to be operative. The quick freeze option shall be switched off except as specified in section 3.1. Additional clarifications are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.6.
2.3Anti-Sweat Heaters. The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric freezer equipped with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.2.
2.4The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as specified in section 2.6 below;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) section 7.4.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 of this appendix. Settings for special compartments shall be as described in section 2.5 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing; and
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use.
For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.5Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. This requirement for the coldest temperature does not apply to features or functions (such as quick freeze) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.6The space between the back of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.7Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the temperature measurements taken at four minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 °F. (0.023 °C.) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B.
3.1Model with No User Operable Temperature Control. A test shall be performed during which the compartment temperature and energy use shall be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously. If the model has the quick freeze option, this option must be used to bypass the temperature control.
3.2Model with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the standardized temperature of 0.0 °F (−17.8 °C).
3.2.1A first test shall be performed with all temperature controls set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest settings. For mechanical control systems, knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings—if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. If the compartment temperature measured during the first test is higher than the standardized temperature, the second test shall be conducted with the controls set at the coldest settings. If the compartment temperature measured during the first test is lower than the standardized temperature, the second test shall be conducted with the controls set at the warmest settings. If the compartment temperatures measured during these two tests bound the standardized temperature, then these test results shall be used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their coldest settings is above the standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest settings and the result of this test shall be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at their coldest settings to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest settings is below the standardized temperature, then
3.2.2Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment temperature is below the standardized temperature, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If the above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
3.2.3Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the compartment temperature is above the standardized temperature, a second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting and the results of these two tests shall be used to determine energy consumption. If the above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2 and using the control settings as set forth in section 3 of this appendix.
4.1Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be no less than 3 hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. A compressor cycle is a complete “on” and a complete “off” period of the motor. If no “off” cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the test period shall be 3 hours. If incomplete cycling occurs (less than two compressor cycles during a 24-hour period), the results of the 24-hour period shall be used.
4.2Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternate provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of 4.2.2 shall apply.
4.2.1Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the two-part test described in this section may be used. The first part is the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part would start when a defrost is initiated when the compressor “on” cycle is terminated prior to start of the defrost heater and terminates at the second turn “on” of the compressor or 4 hours from the initiation of the defrost heater, whichever comes first.
4.2.2Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
5.1Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figure 7.2 of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and shall be accurate to within ± 0.5 °F (0.3 °C). If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with those shown in Figure 7.2 of HRF-1-1979, the product may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the cabinet, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.14, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used.
5.1.1Measured Temperature. The measured temperature is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken at a particular time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
5.1.2Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken during one or more complete compressor cycles. One compressor cycle is one complete motor “on” and one complete motor “off” period. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the test period specified in 4.2.1. For models equipped with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in 4.2.2.
5.1.2.1The number of complete compressor motor cycles over which the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of minutes between measured temperature readings rounded up to the next whole minute or a number of complete cycles over a time period exceeding one hour. One of the compressor cycles shall be the last complete compressor cycle during the test period before start of the defrost control sequence for products with automatic defrost.
5.1.2.2If no compressor motor cycling occurs, the compartment temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last thirty-two minutes of the test period.
5.1.2.3If incomplete cycling occurs (less than one compressor cycle), the compartment temperature shall be the average of all readings taken during the last 3 hours of the last complete compressor “on” period.
5.1.3Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartment temperature shall be calculated as:
5.2Energy Measurements:
5.2.1Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4.1 adjusted to a 24 hour period.
The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1Nonautomatic and automatic defrost models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.2Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.2.1.3Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
5.3Volume measurements. The total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and section 5.1 through 5.3.
6.1Adjusted Total Volume. The adjusted total volume, VA, for freezers under test shall be defined as:
6.2Average Per Cycle Energy Consumption:
6.2.1The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the compartment temperature attainable as shown below.
6.2.1.1If the compartment temperature is always below 0.0 °F. (−17.8 °C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.1.2If one of the compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 0.0 °F (17.8 °C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
6.2.2Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (E
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27.
The provisions of this appendix C shall apply to products manufactured after September 29, 2003. The restriction on representations concerning energy use or efficiency in 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2) shall apply on February 25, 2004.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.3.1For tests of the sensor heavy response, as defined in section 1.9 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. Four of the eight place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference,
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. Two of the four place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference,
2.6.3.2For tests of the sensor medium response, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. Two of the eight place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference,
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference,
2.6.3.3For tests of the sensor light response, as defined in section 1.10 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. One of the eight place settings must be soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference,
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to the ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference,
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Test instruments must be calibrated annually.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2Drying energy.
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
Take the value recorded in section 4.3 of this appendix as the per-cycle water energy consumption. Express the value, V, in gallons per cycle.
5.3.2
The water consumption for the sensor normal cycle, V, is defined as:
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
5.5.1
For each test cycle, calculate the water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, W
5.5.2
5.6
Then calculate the estimated annual standby power use, S, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as:
Manufacturers must continue to use appendix D to subpart B of part 430 until the energy conservation standards for clothes dryers at 10 CFR 430.32(h) are amended to require mandatory compliance using appendix D1.
1.1“AHAM” means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.2“Bone dry” means a condition of a load of test clothes which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.3“Compact” or compact size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
1.4“Cool down” means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
1.5“Cycle” means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling and drying.
1.6“Drum capacity” means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet.
1.7“HLD-1” means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and titled “AHAM Performance Evaluation Procedure for Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers”, June 1974, and designated as HLD-1.
1.8“HLD-2EC” means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and titled “Test Method for Measuring Energy Consumption of Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,” December 1975, and designated as HLD-2EC.
1.9“Standard size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater.
1.10“Moisture content” means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent.
1.11“Automatic termination control” means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark or detent which indicates a preferred automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to be classified as having an “automatic termination control.” A mark is a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls.
1.12“Temperature sensing control” means a system which monitors dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.13“Moisture sensing control” means a system which utilizes a moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
2.1
2.2
2.3Energy supply.
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.1.2
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
(a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is a blended fabric of 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard after test cloth preconditioning and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester fibers.
(b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and width.
(c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not exceed 25 runs.
2.6.2
2.6.3
A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as follows:
(1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of ±1 percent, or less, as prescribed in Section 1.2.
(2) Place test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17 parts per million hardness or less), using 6.0 grams of AHAM Standard Test Detergent, IIA, per gallon of water. Wash water temperature is to controlled at 140°±5 °F (60°±2.7 °C). Rinse water temperature is to be controlled at 100°±5 °F (37.7±2.7 °C).
(3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
(4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in Section 1.2 and weigh the load.
(5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of one percent or less.
(6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent, followed by two warm water rinses.
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
3.4.2Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as described in 2.7.
3.4.3Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test described in 3.3.
3.4.4Test room conditions, temperature and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.
3.4.5For electric dryers—the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, E
3.4.6For gas dryers:
3.4.6.1Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, E
3.4.6.2Cubic feet of gas per cycle, E
3.4.6.3On gas dryers using a continuously burning pilot light—the cubic feet of gas, E
3.4.6.4Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938. A sample calculation is illustrated in appendix E of HLD-1.
3.5
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Appendix D1 to subpart B of part 430 is informational only. Manufacturers must continue to use appendix D to subpart B of part 430 until compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for clothes dryers at 10 CFR 430.32(h) is required, at which time manufacturers must use appendix D1.
1.1“Active mode” means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of tumbling the clothing with or without heated or unheated forced air circulation to remove moisture from the clothing, remove wrinkles or prevent wrinkling of the clothing, or both.
1.2“AHAM” means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.3“AHAM HLD-1” means the test standard published by the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled “Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers” (2009), AHAM HLD-1-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
1.4“Automatic termination control” means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark, detent, or other visual indicator or detent which indicates a
1.5“Bone dry” means a condition of a load of test clothes which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed, and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.6“Compact” or “compact size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
1.7“Conventional clothes dryer” means a clothes dryer that exhausts the evaporated moisture from the cabinet.
1.8“Cool down” means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
1.9“Cycle” means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling, and drying.
1.10“Drum capacity” means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet.
1.11“IEC 62301” means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (“IEC”), titled “Household electrical appliances-Measurement of standby power,” Publication 62301 (first edition June 2005) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
1.12“Inactive mode” means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
1.13“Moisture content” means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent.
1.14“Moisture sensing control” means a system which utilizes a moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.15“Off mode” means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode.
1.16“Standard size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater.
1.17“Standby mode” means any product modes where the energy using product is connected to a main power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time:
(a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
1.18“Temperature sensing control” means a system which monitors dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.19“Ventless clothes dryer” means a clothes dryer that uses a closed-loop system with an internal condenser to remove the evaporated moisture from the heated air. The moist air is not discharged from the cabinet.
2.1
2.2
2.2.1For drying testing, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75 ± 3 ° F and the room relative humidity at 50 ± 10 percent relative humidity.
2.2.2For standby and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in section 4, paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.1.2
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
(a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is a blended fabric of 50-percent cotton and 50-percent polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard after test cloth preconditioning, and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50-percent cotton and 50-percent polyester fibers.
(b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than 4 percent on the length and width.
(c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not exceed 25 runs.
2.6.2
2.6.3
A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as follows:
(1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of ± 1 percent, or less, as prescribed in section 1.5.
(2) Place the test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17 parts per million hardness or less), using 60.8 grams of AHAM standard test detergent Formula 3. Wash water temperature is to be controlled at 140 ° ± 5 °F (60 ° ± 2.7 °C). Rinse water temperature is to be controlled at 100 ° ± 5 °F (37.7 ± 2.7 °C).
(3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
(4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in section 1.5 and weigh the load.
(5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of 1 percent or less.
(6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent, followed by two warm water rinses.
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
3.4.2Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as described in 2.7.
3.4.3Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test described in 3.3.
3.4.4Test room conditions, temperature, and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.1.
3.4.5For electric dryers—the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, E
3.4.6For gas dryers:
3.4.6.1Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, E
3.4.6.2Cubic feet of gas per cycle, E
3.4.6.3Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938.
3.5
3.6
3.6.1If a clothes dryer has an inactive mode, as defined in 1.12, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the clothes dryer, P
3.6.2If a clothes dryer has an off mode, as defined in 1.15, measure and record the average off mode power of the clothes dryer, P
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
a. Heat Pump Water Heater with Storage Tank means an air-to-water heat pump sold by the manufacturer with an insulated storage tank as a packaged unit. The tank and heat pump can be an integral unit or they can be separated.
b. Heat Pump Water Heater without Storage Tank (also called Add-on Heat Pump Water Heater) means an air-to-water heat pump designed for use with a storage-type water heater or a storage tank that is not specified or supplied by the manufacturer.
1.12.4
1.12.5
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.1
4.2
4.3
All dimensions noted in Figures 1 through 7 shall be achieved. All piping between the water heater and the inlet and outlet temperature sensors, noted as T
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.10
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
For heat pump water heaters that control an auxiliary resistive element, the thermostat shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
5.1.4.2
5.1.4.3
Initiate a draw after a maximum mean tank temperature has been observed following cut-out. Record the time when the draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time of zero (τ* = 0). (The superscript * is used to denote variables pertaining to the first-hour rating test.) Record the outlet water temperature beginning 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during this first draw and record it as T*
Initiate a second and, if applicable, successive draw each time the applicable draw initiation criteria described in section 5.1.4.2 are satisfied. As required for the first draw, record the outlet water temperature 15 seconds after initiating each draw and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during each draw and record it as T*
If a draw is occurring at an elapsed time of one hour, continue this draw until the outlet temperature decreases to T*
5.1.5
With the water heater turned off, fill the water heater with supply water and apply pressure as described in section 2.5. Turn on the water heater and associated heat pump unit, if present. After the cut-out occurs, the water heater may be operated for up to three cycles of drawing until cut-in, and then operating until cut-out, prior to the start of the test.
At this time, record the mean tank temperature (T
All draws during the simulated use test shall be made at flow rates of 3.0 gallons ±0.25 gallons per minute (11.4 liters ±0.95 liters per minute). Measurements of the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every subsequent 5-second interval throughout the duration of each draw. The arithmetic mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature shall be determined for each draw (T
At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, record the maximum mean tank temperature observed after cut-out, T
At the end of the recovery period that follows the sixth draw, determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed since the beginning of the test, Q
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
After recording the scale or water meter reading, initiate water flow throughout the water heater, record the inlet and outlet water temperatures beginning 15 seconds after the start of the test and at subsequent 5-second intervals throughout the duration of the test. At the end of 10 minutes, turn off the water. Determine the mass of water collected, M
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every 5-second interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. The arithmetic mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature shall be determined for each draw. Record the scale used to measure the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed, Q
5.2.4.2
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be made 5 seconds after a draw is initiated and at every 5-second interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. Determine the arithmetic mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature for each draw. Record the scale used to measure the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed, Q
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2.
For the case in which a draw is not in progress at the elapsed time of one hour and a final draw is imposed at the elapsed time of one hour, the first-hour rating shall be calculated using
6.1.3
The recovery efficiency for electric water heaters with immersed heating elements is assumed to be 98%.
6.1.4
Q
The standby heat loss coefficient for the tank is computed as:
6.1.5
6.1.6
A modification is also needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 °F (135 °F-58 °F) or 42.8 °C (57.2 °C-14.4 °C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 °F (42.8 °C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water, Btu/day (kJ/day), may be computed as:
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77 °F (42.8 °C) temperature rise, Btu/day (kJ/day), is:
The difference between these two values is:
6.1.7Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed as:
6.1.8
6.2
6.2.1
If a water meter is used the maximum gpm (L/min) rating is computed as:
6.2.2
6.2.2.1
6.2.2.2
The minimum recovery efficiency is computed as:
The recovery efficiency is computed as:
6.2.3
A modification is needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 °F (135 °F−58 °F) or 42.8 °C (57.2 °C−14.4 °C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 °F (42.8 °C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water may be computed as:
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77 °F (42.8 °C) temperature rise is:
The difference between these two values is:
6.2.4
6.2.5
In order to relieve the test burden on manufacturers who offer water heaters which differ only in fuel type or power input, ratings for untested models may be established in accordance with the following procedures. In lieu of the following procedures a manufacturer may elect to test the unit for which a rating is sought.
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
Manufacturers are not required to use the test procedures and calculations that refer to standby mode and off mode energy consumption, (specifically, sections 2.2, 3.2, 4.2, and 5.3 of this appendix F) until the compliance date of any amended energy conservation standards for room air conditioners at 10 CFR 430.32(b).
1.
1.1“Active mode” means a mode in which the room air conditioner is connected to a mains power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of cooling or heating the conditioned space, or circulating air through activation of its fan or blower, with or without energizing active air-cleaning components or devices such as ultraviolet (UV) radiation, electrostatic filters, ozone generators, or other air-cleaning devices.
1.2“ANSI/AHAM RAC-1” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled “Room Air Conditioners,” Standard RAC-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
1.3“ANSI/ASHRAE 16” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners and Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners,” Standard 16-1983 (RA 2009) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
1.4“IEC 62301” means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, (“IEC”), titled “Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power,” Publication 62301 (first edition June 2005), (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
1.5“Inactive mode” means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control) or internal sensor or which provides continuous status display.
1.6“Off mode” means a mode in which a room air conditioner is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the clasification of an off mode.
1.7“Standby mode” means any product modes where the where the energy using product is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time:
(a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (
2.
2.1
2.2
3.
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
4.
4.1
4.2
4.2.1If a room air conditioner has an inactive mode, as defined in 1.5, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the room air conditioner, P
4.2.2If a room air conditioner has an off mode, as defined in 1.6, measure and record the average off mode power of the room air conditioner, P
5.
5.1Calculate the cooling capacity (expressed in Btu/hr) as required in section 6.1 of ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
5.2Determine the electrical power input (expressed in watts) as required by section 6.5 of ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
5.3
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.5
2.1
Allow the auxiliary electrical system of a forced air unvented gas, propane, or oil heater to operate for at least five minutes before recording the maximum auxiliary electric power measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum auxiliary electric power (P
2.2
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil equipped with auxiliary electrical systems, calculate the rated output (Q
The procedures and calculations in this appendix need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for conventional ranges, conventional cooking tops, conventional ovens, and microwave ovens at this time. However, any representation related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of these products made after September 6, 2011 must be based upon results generated under this test procedure, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2). After July 1, 2010, however, when DOE adopts an energy conservation standard that incorporates standby mode and off mode energy consumption, and upon the compliance date for such standards, compliance with the applicable provisions of this test procedure will also be required. Future revisions may add relevant
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.2
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
2.2.2.3
2.2.2.4
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
2.7
The bottom of each block shall be flat to within 0.002 inch (0.051 mm) TIR (total indicator reading). Determine the actual weight of each test block with a scale with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.5.
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.8[Reserved]
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.1.1
2.9.1.2
2.9.1.3
2.9.2
2.9.2.1
2.9.2.2
2.9.3
2.9.3.1
2.9.3.2
2.9.3.3
2.9.3.4
2.9.4
2.9.5
3.1.
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
3.1.1.2
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.1.1
3.2.1.2
3.2.1.3
3.2.1.4
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1Record the test room temperature, T
3.3.2Record measured test block weights W
3.3.3Record the initial temperature, T
3.3.4For a conventional oven with a thermostat which operates by cycling on and off, record the conventional oven test measurements T
3.3.5For a conventional oven that can be operated with or without forced convection and the oven thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off, measure the energy consumed with the forced convection mode, (E
3.3.6Record the measured energy consumption, E
3.3.7Record the gas flow rate, Q
3.3.8Record the clock power measurement or rating, P
3.3.9For the surface unit under test, record the electric energy consumption, E
3.3.10Record the gas flow rate, Q
3.3.11Record the heating value, H
3.3.12Record the heating value, H
3.3.13Record the average standby mode power, P
4.1
4.1.1
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy to obtain the oven test energy consumption, E
4.1.1.1
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy to obtain the average test energy consumption E
4.1.2
4.1.2.1.
4.1.2.1.1.
4.1.2.1.2
4.1.2.2
4.1.2.3
4.1.2.3.1
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be disconnected during the self-cleaning test procedure may be subtracted from the test energy to obtain the test energy consumption, E
4.1.2.3.2
4.1.2.4
4.1.2.5
4.1.2.5.1
4.1.2.5.2
If the conventional gas oven uses electrical energy, calculate the total annual electrical energy consumption, E
4.1.2.6.
4.1.2.6.1
If the oven also uses electrical energy, calculate the total annual electrical energy consumption, E
4.1.3
4.1.3.1
For electric ovens:
For gas ovens:
4.1.3.2
4.1.4
For electric ovens,
For gas ovens:
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be disconnected during the cooktop test may be subtracted from the energy consumption, E
4.2.1.2
4.2.1.3
4.2.2
4.2.2.1
4.2.2.2
4.2.2.2.1
4.2.2.2.3
4.2.3
For an electric cooking top, the energy factor is the same as the cooking efficiency as determined according to Section 4.2.1.3.
For gas cooking tops,
4.3
The provisions of this appendix J shall apply to products manufactured after April 13, 2001. The procedures and calculations in sections 3.3, 4.3, and 4.4 of this appendix need not be performed to determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes washers.
1.1
Appendix J does not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system. Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.1.1
2.5.1.2
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.1.1Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs 5.75 oz/yd
2.6.1.2Cloth material that is 24 in by 36 in (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm) and has been hemmed to 22 in by 34 in (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and width.
2.6.1.3The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not exceed 60 test runs. All energy test cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
2.6.2
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.8.1For a standard size clothes washer, a seven pound load, as described in section 2.7.1, shall be used to test the maximum water fill and a three pound test load, as described in section 2.7.2, shall be used to test the minimum water fill.
2.8.2For a compact size clothes washer, a three pound test load as described in section 2.7.2 shall be used to test the maximum and minimum water fill levels.
2.8.3A vertical-axis clothes washer without adaptive water fill control system also shall be tested without a test load for purposes of calculating the energy factor.
2.8.4The test load sizes to be used to measure remaining moisture content (RMC) are specified in section 3.3.2.
2.8.5Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then dropping them into the clothes container prior to activating the clothes washer.
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.11.1For energy and water consumption tests, set at the normal cycle settings. If settings at the normal cycle are not offered, set the control settings to the maximum speed permitted on the clothes washer.
2.11.2For remaining moisture content tests, see section 3.3.
3.1
3.1.1Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
3.1.2Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
3.1.3Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
3.1.4Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 °F ±5 °F (15.6 °C ±2.8 °C) or 100 °F ±10 °F (37.8 °C ±5.5 °C) water to its uppermost edge. Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds.
3.1.5The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows:
3.2
3.2.1A clothes washer that has infinite temperature selections shall be tested at the following temperature settings: hottest setting available on the machine, hot (a minimum of 140 °F (60.0 °C) and a maximum of 145 °F (62.8 °C)), warm (a minimum of 100 °F (37.8 °C) and a maximum of 105 °F (40.6 °C)), and coldest setting available on the machine. These temperatures must be confirmed by measurement using a temperature measuring device. If the measured final water temperature is not within the specified range, stop testing, adjust the temperature selector accordingly, and repeat the procedure.
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
3.2.2.2
3.2.2.2.1If a clothes washer's temperature combination selections are such that the temperature of each warm wash setting that is above the mean warm wash temperature (the mean temperature of the coldest and warmest warm settings) is matched by a warm wash setting that is an equal distance below the mean, then the energy test shall be conducted at the mean warm wash temperature if such a selection is provided, or if there is no position on the control that permits selection of the mean temperature, the energy test shall be conducted with the temperature selection set at the next hotter temperature setting that is available above the mean.
3.2.2.2.2If the multiple warm wash temperature combination selections do not meet criteria in section 3.2.2.2.1, the energy test shall be conducted with the temperature selection set at the warm wash temperature setting that gives the next higher water temperature than the mean temperature of the coldest and warmest warm settings.
3.2.2.3
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
3.2.3.1.1For automatic clothes washers, set the wash/rinse temperature selector to the hottest temperature combination setting. For semi-automatic clothes washers, open the hot water faucet valve completely and close the cold water faucet valve completely to achieve the hottest temperature combination setting.
3.2.3.1.2Measure the electrical energy consumption of the clothes washer for the complete cycle.
3.2.3.1.3Measure the respective number of gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water used to fill the tub for the wash cycle.
3.2.3.1.4Measure the respective number of gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water used for all deep rinse cycles.
3.2.3.1.5Measure the respective gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water used for all spray rinse cycles.
3.2.3.1.6For non-water-heating automatic clothes washers repeat sections 3.2.3.1.3 through 3.2.3.1.5 for each of the other wash/rinse temperature selections available that uses heated water and is required to be tested. For water-heating clothes washers, repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 through 3.2.3.1.5 for each of the other wash/rinse temperature selections available that uses heated water and is required to be tested. (When calculating water consumption under section 4.3 for any machine covered by the previous two sentences, also test the cold wash/cold rinse selection.) For semi-automatic clothes washers, repeat sections 3.2.3.1.3 through 3.2.3.1.5 for the other wash/rinse temperature settings in section 6 with the following water faucet valve adjustments:
3.2.3.1.7If the clothes washer is equipped with a suds-saver cycle, repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 to 3.2.3.1.5 with suds-saver switch set to suds return for the Warm/Cold temperature setting.
3.2.3.2
3.2.3.3
3.2.4
3.2.4.1Set the cycle selector to a non-normal cycle which has the wash/rinse temperature combination selection that is locked out. Set the water level selector at maximum fill and insert the appropriate test load, if applicable. Activate the cycle of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver switch. Set the wash/rinse temperature selector to the temperature combination setting that is locked out in the normal cycle and repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 through 3.2.3.1.5.
3.2.4.2Repeat section 3.2.4.1 under the same temperature combination setting for all other untested non-normal cycles on the machine that have the wash/rinse temperature combination selection that is locked out.
3.2.4.3Total the measured hot water consumption of the wash, deep rinse, and spray rinse of each non-normal cycle tested in sections 3.2.4.1 through 3.2.4.2 and compare the total for each cycle. The cycle that has the highest hot water consumption shall be the most energy intensive cycle for that particular wash/rinse temperature combination setting.
3.2.4.4Set the water level selector at minimum fill and insert the appropriate test load, if applicable. Activate the most energy intensive cycle, as determined in section 3.2.4.3, of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver switch. Repeat tests as described in section 3.2.4.1.
3.3
3.3.1The wash temperature shall be the same as the rinse temperature for all testing. Cold rinse is the coldest rinse temperature available on the machine. Warm rinse is the hottest rinse temperature available on the machine.
3.3.2Determine the test load as shown in the following table:
3.3.3For clothes washers with cold rinse only.
3.3.3.1Record the actual bone dry weight of the test load (WI), then place the test load in the clothes washer.
3.3.3.2Set water level selector to maximum fill.
3.3.3.3Run the normal cycle.
3.3.3.4Record the weight of the test load immediately after completion of the normal cycle (WC).
3.3.3.5Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load, RMC, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
3.3.4For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options.
3.3.4.1Complete steps 3.3.3.1 through 3.3.3.4 for the cold rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load for cold rinse, RMC
3.3.4.2Complete steps 3.3.3.1 through 3.3.3.4 for the warm rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load for warm rinse, RMC
3.3.4.3Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load, RMC, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
3.3.5Clothes washers which have options that result in different RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times that are available in the normal cycle,
3.4
3.4.1For non-water-heating clothes washers, record the kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, M
3.4.2Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water consumption, Vh
3.4.3Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water consumption, Vh
3.4.4Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water, Sh
3.4.5Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold water, Sh
3.4.6Data recording requirements for RMC tests are listed in sections 3.3.3 through 3.3.5.
4.1
4.1.1
For clothes washers equipped with the suds-saver feature:
For clothes washers not equipped with the suds-saver feature:
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.5.1
4.1.5.2
4.1.5.2.1Calculate for the cycle under test the per-cycle temperature weighted electrical energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, Eh
4.1.5.2.2
4.1.6
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
For clothes washers equipped with suds-saver feature:
For clothes washers not equipped with suds-saver feature:
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
4.5
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.2
6.1
7.1
7.2
7.3
Calculate:
The percentage weighting factors:
Energy consumption values, E
The provisions of this appendix J expire on December 31, 2003.
The provisions of this appendix J1 shall apply to products manufactured beginning January 1, 2004.
1.1
Appendix J1 does not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system. Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
The following examples are provided to show how the above symbols can be used to define variables:
1.22
1.23
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.1.1
2.5.1.2
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.1.1The energy test cloth shall not be used for more than 25 test runs and shall be clean and consist of the following:
(A) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs 5.75 ounces per square yard (195.0 g/m
(B) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm) and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and width.
2.6.1.2The new test cloths, including energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned in a clothes washer in the following manner:
2.6.1.2.1Wash the test cloth using a commercially available clothes washing detergent that is suitable for 135 °F (57.2 °C) wash water as recommended by the manufacturer, with the washer set on maximum water level. Place detergent in washer and then place the new load to be conditioned in the washer. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water (17ppm or less). Wash water is to be hot, and controlled at 135 °F±5 °F (57.2 °C ±2.8 °C). Rinse water temperature is to be cold, and controlled at 60 °F ±5 °F (15.6 °C ±2.8 °C). Rinse the load through a second rinse using the same water temperature (if an optional second rinse is available on the clothes washer, use it).
2.6.1.2.2Dry the load.
2.6.1.2.3A final cycle is to be hot water wash with no detergent followed by two cold water rinses.
2.6.1.2.4Dry the load.
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.3.1Perform 5 complete normal wash-rinse-spin cycles, the first two with AHAM Standard detergent 2A and the last three without detergent. Place the test cloth in a clothes washer set at the maximum water level. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water (17 ppm hardness or less) using 6.0 grams per gallon of water of AHAM Standard detergent 2A. The wash temperature is to be controlled to 135 °F ±5 °F (57.2 °C ±2.8 °C) and the rinse temperature is to be controlled to 60 °F ±5 °F (15.6 °C ±2.8 °C). Repeat the cycle with detergent and then repeat the cycle three additional times without detergent, bone drying the load between cycles (total of five wash and rinse cycles).
2.6.4
2.6.4.1
2.6.4.2The fabric weight shall be 5.60 ounces per square yard (190.0 g/m
2.6.4.3The thread count shall be 61 × 54 per inch (warp × fill), ±2 percent.
2.6.4.4The warp yarn and filling yarn shall each have fiber content of 50 percent ±4 percent cotton, with the balance being polyester, and be open end spun, 15/1 ±5 percent cotton count blended yarn.
2.6.4.5Water repellent finishes, such as fluoropolymer stain resistant finishes shall not be applied to the test cloth. The absence of such finishes shall be verified by:
2.6.4.5.1American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) Test Method 118—1997,
2.6.4.5.2American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) Test Method 79-2000,
2.6.4.5.3The standards listed in 2.6.4.5.1 and 2.6.4.5.2 of this appendix which are not otherwise set forth in this part 430 are incorporated by reference. The material listed in this paragraph has been approved for incorporation by reference by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Any subsequent amendment to a standard by the standard-setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval and notice of any change in the material will be published in the
(a) The above standards incorporated by reference are available for inspection at:
(i) National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
(ii) U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy,
(b) Copies of the above standards incorporated by reference can be obtained from the American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 1215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, telephone (919) 549-8141, telefax (919) 549-8933, or electronic mail:
2.6.4.6The moisture absorption and retention shall be evaluated for each new lot of test cloth by the Standard Extractor Remaining Moisture Content (RMC) Test specified in 2.6.5 of this appendix.
2.6.4.6.1Repeat the Standard Extractor RMC Test in 2.6.5 of this appendix three times.
2.6.4.6.2An RMC correction curve shall be calculated as specified in 2.6.6 of this appendix.
2.6.5
2.6.5.1The standard extractor RMC tests shall be run in a Bock Model 215 extractor (having a basket diameter of 19.5 inches, length of 12 inches, and volume of 2.1 ft
2.6.5.2
2.6.5.3
2.6.5.3.1Record the “bone-dry” weight of the test load (WI).
2.6.5.3.2Soak the test load for 20 minutes in 10 gallons of soft (<17 ppm) water. The entire test load shall be submerged. The water temperature shall be 100 °F ±5 °F.
2.6.5.3.3Remove the test load and allow water to gravity drain off of the test cloths. Then manually place the test cloths in the basket of the extractor, distributing them evenly by eye. Spin the load at a fixed speed corresponding to the intended centripetal acceleration level (measured in units of the acceleration of gravity, g) ±1 g for the intended time period ±5 seconds.
2.6.5.3.4Record the weight of the test load immediately after the completion of the extractor spin cycle (WC).
2.6.5.3.5Calculate the RMC as (WC-WI)/WI.
2.6.5.3.6The RMC of the test load shall be measured at three (3) g levels: 100g; 200g; and 350g, using two different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes. If a clothes washer design can achieve spin speeds in the 500g range then the RMC of the test load shall be measured at four (4) g levels: 100g; 200g; 350g; and 500g, using two different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes.
2.6.5.4Repeat 2.6.5.3 of this appendix using soft (<17 ppm) water at 60 °F ±5 °F.
2.6.6
2.6.6.1Average the values of 3 test runs and fill in table 2.6.5 of this appendix. Perform a linear least-squares fit to relate the standard RMC (RMC
(RMC
2.6.6.2.Perform an analysis of variance test using two factors, spin speed and lot, to check the interaction of speed and lot. Use the values from Table 2.6.5 and Table 2.6.6.1 in the calculation. The “P” value in the variance analysis shall be greater than or equal to 0.1. If the “P” value is less than 0.1 the test cloth is unacceptable. “P” is a theoretically based probability of interaction based on an analysis of variance.
2.6.7
2.6.7.1Using the coefficients A and B calculated in 2.6.6.1 of this appendix:
2.6.7.2Substitute RMC
2.7
2.8
2.8.1The test load sizes to be used to measure RMC are specified in section 3.8.1.
2.8.2Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements shall be bone dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried to a maximum of 104 percent of bone dry weight for subsequent testing.
2.8.3Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then put them into the clothes container prior to activating the clothes washer.
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.10
2.11
3.1
3.1.1Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
3.1.2Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
3.1.3Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
3.1.4Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 °F±5 °F (15.6 °C±2.8 °C) or 100 °F±10 °F (37.8 °C±5.5 °C) water to its uppermost edge. Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds.
3.1.5The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows:
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.1.1For automatic clothes washers set the wash/rinse temperature selection control to obtain the wash water temperature desired (extra hot, hot, warm, or cold) and cold rinse, and open both the hot and cold water faucets.
3.2.1.2For semi-automatic washers: (1) For hot water temperature, open the hot water faucet completely and close the cold water faucet; (2) for warm inlet water temperature, open both hot and cold water faucets completely; (3) for cold water temperature, close the hot water faucet and open the cold water faucet completely.
3.2.1.3
For non-water-heating clothes washers, calculate Tw as follows:
For water-heating clothes washers, measure and record the temperature of each warm wash selection after fill.
3.2.2Total water consumption during the energy test cycle shall be measured, including hot and cold water consumption during wash, deep rinse, and spray rinse.
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
3.2.3.2
3.2.3.2.1.Not user adjustable. The maximum, minimum, and average water levels as defined in the following sections shall be interpreted to mean that amount of water fill which is selected by the control system when the respective test loads are used, as defined in Table 2.8. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.
3.2.3.2.2User adjustable. Four tests shall be conducted on clothes washers with user adjustable adaptive water fill controls which affect the relative wash water levels. The first test shall be conducted with the maximum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result. The second test shall be conducted with the minimum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the least energy intensive result. The third test shall be conducted with the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result for the given test load. The fourth test shall be conducted with the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the least energy intensive result for the given test load. The energy and water consumption for the average test load and water level, shall be the average of the third and fourth tests.
3.2.3.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.2.1
3.5.2.2
3.5.2.3
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7
3.7.1For the rinse only, measure the amount of hot water consumed by the clothes washer including all deep and spray rinses, for the maximum (R
3.7.2Measure the amount of electrical energy consumed by the clothes washer to heat the rinse water only, including all deep and spray rinses, for the maximum (ER
3.8
3.8.1The wash temperature will be the same as the rinse temperature for all testing. Use the maximum test load as defined in Table 5.1 and section 3.1 for testing.
3.8.2
3.8.2.1Record the actual ‘bone dry’ weight of the test load (WI
3.8.2.2Set water level selector to maximum fill.
3.8.2.3Run the energy test cycle.
3.8.2.4Record the weight of the test load immediately after completion of the energy test cycle (WC
3.8.2.5Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMC
3.8.3
3.8.3.1Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for cold rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for cold rinse, RMC
3.8.3.2Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for warm rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for warm rinse, RMC
3.8.3.3Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMC
3.8.4Clothes washers which have options that result in different RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times, that are available in the energy test cycle, shall be tested at the maximum and minimum extremes of the available options, excluding any “no spin” (zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements in 3.8.2 or 3.8.3. The calculated RMC
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.4
4.5
6.1
6.2
The field test results would be used to determine the best method to correlate the rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the base clothes washer. If the base clothes washer is rated at A kWh per year, but field tests at B kWh per year, and the test clothes washer field tests at D kWh per year, the test unit would be rated as follows:
6.3
Calculate:
The percentage weighting factors:
Energy consumption (HE
The procedures and calculations that refer to off mode energy consumption (
2.1Test room requirements.
2.2Test unit installation requirements.
2.2.1Defrost control settings.
2.2.2Special requirements for units having a multiple-speed outdoor fan.
2.2.3Special requirements for multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps, and systems composed of multiple mini-split units (outdoor units located side-by-side) that would normally operate using two or more indoor thermostats.
2.2.4Wet-bulb temperature requirements for the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils.
2.2.4.1Cooling mode tests.
2.2.4.2Heating mode tests.
2.2.5Additional refrigerant charging requirements.
2.3Indoor air volume rates.
2.3.1Cooling tests.
2.3.2Heating tests.
2.4Indoor coil inlet and outlet duct connections.
2.4.1Outlet plenum for the indoor unit.
2.4.2Inlet plenum for the indoor unit.
2.5Indoor coil air property measurements and air damper box applications.
2.5.1Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor coil: For cases where the inlet damper box is installed.
2.5.1.1If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is installed.
2.5.1.2If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not installed.
2.5.2Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor unit: For cases where no inlet damper box is installed.
2.5.3Indoor coil static pressure difference measurement.
2.5.4Test set-up on the outlet side of the indoor coil.
2.5.4.1Outlet air damper box placement and requirements.
2.5.4.2Procedures to minimize temperature maldistribution.
2.5.5Dry bulb temperature measurement.
2.5.6Water vapor content measurement.
2.5.7Air damper box performance requirements.
2.6Airflow measuring apparatus.
2.7Electrical voltage supply.
2.8Electrical power and energy measurements.
2.9Time measurements.
2.10Test apparatus for the secondary space conditioning capacity measurement.
2.10.1Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method.
2.10.2Compressor Calibration Method.
2.10.3Refrigerant Enthalpy Method.
2.11Measurement of test room ambient conditions.
2.12Measurement of indoor fan speed.
2.13Measurement of barometric pressure.
3.1General Requirements.
3.1.1Primary and secondary test methods.
3.1.2Manufacturer-provided equipment overrides.
3.1.3Airflow through the outdoor coil.
3.1.4Airflow through the indoor coil.
3.1.4.1Cooling Certified Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.1.1Cooling Certified Air Volume Rate for Ducted Units.
3.1.4.1.2Cooling Certified Air Volume Rate for Non-ducted Units.
3.1.4.2Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.3Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4Heating Certified Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4.1Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Certified Air Volume Rates are the same.
3.1.4.4.2Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Certified Air Volume Rates are different due to indoor fan operation.
3.1.4.4.3Ducted heating-only heat pumps.
3.1.4.4.4Non-ducted heat pumps, including non-ducted heating-only heat pumps.
3.1.4.5Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.6Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.7Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate.
3.1.5Indoor test room requirement when the air surrounding the indoor unit is not supplied from the same source as the air entering the indoor unit.
3.1.6Air volume rate calculations.
3.1.7Test sequence.
3.1.8Requirement for the air temperature distribution leaving the indoor coil.
3.1.9Control of auxiliary resistive heating elements.
3.2Cooling mode tests for different types of air conditioners and heat pumps.
3.2.1Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
3.2.2Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed.
3.2.2.1Indoor fan capacity modulation that correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature.
3.2.2.2Indoor fan capacity modulation based on adjusting the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio.
3.2.3Tests for a unit having a two-capacity compressor.
3.2.4Tests for a unit having a variable-speed compressor.
3.3Test procedures for steady-state wet coil cooling mode tests (the A, A
3.4Test procedures for the optional steady-state dry coil cooling mode tests (the C, C
3.5Test procedures for the optional cyclic dry coil cooling mode tests (the D, D
3.5.1Procedures when testing ducted systems.
3.5.2Procedures when testing non-ducted systems.
3.5.3Cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient calculation.
3.6Heating mode tests for different types of heat pumps, including heating-only heat pumps.
3.6.1Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a
3.6.2Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan: capacity modulation correlates with outdoor dry bulb temperature.
3.6.3Tests for a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor (see Definition 1.45), including two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46).
3.6.4Tests for a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
3.6.5Additional test for a heat pump having a heat comfort controller.
3.7Test procedures for steady-state Maximum Temperature and High Temperature heating mode tests (the H0
3.8Test procedures for the optional cyclic heating mode tests (the H0C
3.8.1Heating mode cyclic degradation coefficient calculation.
3.9Test procedures for Frost Accumulation heating mode tests (the H
3.9.1Average space heating capacity and electrical power calculations.
3.9.2Demand defrost credit.
3.10Test procedures for steady-state Low Temperature heating mode tests (the H
3.11Additional requirements for the secondary test methods.
3.11.1If using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method.
3.11.1.1If a preliminary test precedes the official test
3.11.1.2If a preliminary test does not precede the official test.
3.11.1.3Official test.
3.11.2If using the Compressor Calibration Method as the secondary test method.
3.11.3If using the Refrigerant Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method.
3.12Rounding of space conditioning capacities for reporting purposes.
4.1Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) Calculations.
4.1.1SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
4.1.2SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.1.2.1Units covered by section 3.2.2.1 where indoor fan capacity modulation correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature.
4.1.2.2Units covered by section 3.2.2.2 where indoor fan capacity modulation is used to adjust the sensible to total cooling capacity ratio.
4.1.3SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a two-capacity compressor.
4.1.3.1Steady-state space cooling capacity at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature T
4.1.3.2Unit alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building cooling load at temperature T
4.1.3.3Unit only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
4.1.3.4Unit must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
4.1.4SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
4.1.4.1Steady-state space cooling capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature T
4.1.4.2Unit operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building cooling load at temperature T
4.1.4.3Unit must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature T
4.2Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) Calculations.
4.2.1Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
4.2.2Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.2.3Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor.
4.2.3.1Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature T
4.2.3.2Heat pump alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building heating load at a temperature T
4.2.3.3Heat pump only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
4.2.3.4Heat pump must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
4.2.4Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
4.2.4.1Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature T
4.2.4.2Heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building heating load at a temperature T
4.2.4.3Heat pump must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature T
4.2.5Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller.
4.2.5.1Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
4.2.5.2Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.2.5.3Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor.
4.2.5.4Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. [Reserved]
4.3Calculations of the Actual and Representative Regional Annual Performance Factors for Heat Pumps.
4.3.1Calculation of actual regional annual performance factors (APF
4.3.2Calculation of representative regional annual performance factors (APF
4.4Rounding of SEER, HSPF, and APF for reporting purposes.
1.1Annual performance factor means the total heating and cooling done by a heat pump in a particular region in one year divided by the total electric energy used in one year. Paragraph (m)(3)(iii) of § 430.23 of the Code of Federal Regulations states the calculation requirements for this rating descriptor.
1.2ARI means Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
1.3ARI Standard 210/240-2006 means the test standard “Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment” published in 2006 by ARI.
1.4ASHRAE means the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
1.5ASHRAE Standard 23-2005 means the test standard “Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units” published in 2005 by ASHRAE.
1.6ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 means the test standard “Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment” published in 2005 by ASHRAE.
1.7ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) means the test standard “Standard Method for Temperature Measurement” published in 1986 and reaffirmed in 2001 by ASHRAE.
1.8ASHRAE Standard 41.2-87 (RA 92) means the test standard “Standard Methods for Laboratory Airflow Measurement” published in 1987 and reaffirmed in 1992 by ASHRAE.
1.9ASHRAE Standard 41.6-94 (RA 01) means the test standard “Method for Measurement of Moist Air Properties” published in 1994 and reaffirmed in 2001 by ASHRAE.
1.10ASHRAE Standard 41.9-00 means the test standard “Calorimeter Test Methods for Mass Flow Measurements of Volatile Refrigerants” published in 2000 by ASHRAE.
1.11ASHRAE Standard 51-99/AMCA Standard 210-1999 means the test standard “Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating” published in 1999 by ASHRAE and the Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
1.12ASHRAE Standard 116-95 RA(05) means the test standard “Methods of Testing for Rating for Seasonal Efficiency of Unitary Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps” published in 1995 and reaffirmed in 2005 by ASHRAE.
1.13CFR means Code of Federal Regulations.
1.14Constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan means a fan that varies its operating speed to provide a fixed air-volume-rate from a ducted system.
1.15Continuously recorded, when referring to a dry bulb measurement, means that the specified temperature must be sampled at regular intervals that are equal to or less than the maximum intervals specified in section 4.3 part “a” of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01). If such dry bulb temperatures are used only for test room control, it means that one samples at regular intervals equal to or less than the maximum intervals specified in section 4.3 part “b” of the same ASHRAE Standard. Regarding wet bulb temperature, dew point temperature, or relative humidity measurements, continuously recorded means that the measurements must
1.16Cooling load factor (CLF) means the ratio having as its numerator the total cooling delivered during a cyclic operating interval consisting of one ON period and one OFF period. The denominator is the total cooling that would be delivered, given the same ambient conditions, had the unit operated continuously at its steady-state space cooling capacity for the same total time (ON + OFF) interval.
1.17Coefficient of Performance (COP) means the ratio of the average rate of space heating delivered to the average rate of electrical energy consumed by the heat pump. These rate quantities must be determined from a single test or, if derived via interpolation, must be tied to a single set of operating conditions. COP is a dimensionless quantity. When determined for a ducted unit tested without an indoor fan installed, COP must include the section 3.7, 3.8, and 3.9.1 default values for the heat output and power input of a fan motor.
1.18Cyclic Test means a test where the unit's compressor is cycled on and off for specific time intervals. A cyclic test provides half the information needed to calculate a degradation coefficient.
1.19Damper box means a short section of duct having an air damper that meets the performance requirements of section 2.5.7.
1.20Degradation coefficient (C
1.21Demand-defrost control system means a system that defrosts the heat pump outdoor coil only when measuring a predetermined degradation of performance. The heat pump's controls monitor one or more parameters that always vary with the amount of frost accumulated on the outdoor coil (
A demand-defrost control system, which otherwise meets the above requirements, may allow time-initiated defrosts if, and only if, such defrosts occur after 6 hours of compressor operating time.
1.22Design heating requirement (DHR) predicts the space heating load of a residence when subjected to outdoor design conditions. Estimates for the minimum and maximum DHR are provided for six generalized U.S. climatic regions in section 4.2.
1.23Dry-coil tests are cooling mode tests where the wet-bulb temperature of the air supplied to the indoor coil is maintained low enough that no condensate forms on this coil.
1.24Ducted system means an air conditioner or heat pump that is designed to be permanently installed equipment and delivers conditioned air to the indoor space through a duct(s). The air conditioner or heat pump may be either a split system or a single-packaged unit.
1.25Energy efficiency ratio (EER) means the ratio of the average rate of space cooling delivered to the average rate of electrical energy consumed by the air conditioner or heat pump. These rate quantities must be determined from a single test or, if derived via interpolation, must be tied to a single set of operating conditions. EER is expressed in units of
1.26Heating load factor (HLF) means the ratio having as its numerator the total heating delivered during a cyclic operating interval consisting of one ON period and one OFF period. The denominator is the total heating that would be delivered, given the same ambient conditions, if the unit operated continuously at its steady-state space heating capacity for the same total time (ON plus OFF) interval.
1.27Heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF) means the total space heating required during the space heating season, expressed in Btu's, divided by the total electrical energy consumed by the heat pump system during the same season, expressed in watt-hours. The HSPF used to evaluate compliance with the Energy Conservation Standards (see 10 CFR 430.32(c), subpart C) is based on Region IV, the minimum standardized design heating requirement, and the sampling plan stated in 10 CFR 430.24(m), subpart B.
1.28Heat pump having a heat comfort controller means equipment that regulates the operation of the electric resistance elements to assure that the air temperature leaving the indoor section does not fall below
1.29Mini-split air conditioners and heat pumps means systems that have a single outdoor section and one or more indoor sections. The indoor sections cycle on and off in unison in response to a single indoor thermostat.
1.30Multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps means systems that have two or more indoor sections. The indoor sections operate independently and can be used to condition multiple zones in response to multiple indoor thermostats.
1.31Non-ducted system means an air conditioner or heat pump that is designed to be permanently installed equipment and directly heats or cools air within the conditioned space using one or more indoor coils that are mounted on room walls and/or ceilings. The unit may be of a modular design that allows for combining multiple outdoor coils and compressors to create one overall system. Non-ducted systems covered by this test procedure are all split systems.
1.32Part-load factor (PLF) means the ratio of the cyclic energy efficiency ratio (coefficient of performance) to the steady-state energy efficiency ratio (coefficient of performance). Evaluate both energy efficiency ratios (coefficients of performance) based on operation at the same ambient conditions.
1.33Seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) means the total heat removed from the conditioned space during the annual cooling season, expressed in Btu's, divided by the total electrical energy consumed by the air conditioner or heat pump during the same season, expressed in watt-hours. The SEER calculation in section 4.1 of this appendix and the sampling plan stated in 10 CFR subpart B, 430.24(m) are used to evaluate compliance with the Energy Conservation Standards. (See 10 CFR 430.32(c), subpart C.)
1.34Single-packaged unit means any central air conditioner or heat pump that has all major assemblies enclosed in one cabinet.
1.35Small-duct, high-velocity system means a system that contains a blower and indoor coil combination that is designed for, and produces, at least 1.2 inches (of water) of external static pressure when operated at the full-loadair volume rate of 220-350 cfm per rated ton of cooling. When applied in the field, small-duct products use high-velocity room outlets (
1.36Split system means any air conditioner or heat pump that has one or more of the major assemblies separated from the others.
1.37Standard Air means dry air having a mass density of 0.075 lb/ft
1.38Steady-state test means a test where the test conditions are regulated to remain as constant as possible while the unit operates continuously in the same mode.
1.39Temperature bin means the 5 °F increments that are used to partition the outdoor dry-bulb temperature ranges of the cooling (≥ 65 °F) and heating (< 65 °F) seasons.
1.40Test condition tolerance means the maximum permissible difference between the average value of the measured test parameter and the specified test condition.
1.41Test operating tolerance means the maximum permissible range that a measurement may vary over the specified test interval. The difference between the maximum and minimum sampled values must be less than or equal to the specified test operating tolerance.
1.42Time adaptive defrost control system is a demand-defrost control system (see definition 1.21) that measures the length of the prior defrost period(s) and uses that information to automatically determine when to initiate the next defrost cycle.
1.43Time-temperature defrost control systems initiate or evaluate initiating a defrost cycle only when a predetermined cumulative compressor ON-time is obtained. This predetermined ON-time is generally a fixed value (
In a second application of the control scheme, one or more parameters are measured (
1.44Triple-split system means an air conditioner or heat pump that is composed of three separate components: An outdoor fan coil section, an indoor fan coil section, and an indoor compressor section.
1.45Two-capacity (or two-stage) compressor means an air conditioner or heat pump that has one of the following:
(1) A two-speed compressor,
(2) Two compressors where only one compressor ever operates at a time,
(3) Two compressors where one compressor (Compressor #1) operates at low loads and both compressors (Compressors #1 and #2) operate at high loads but Compressor #2 never operates alone, or
(4) A compressor that is capable of cylinder or scroll unloading.
For such systems, low capacity means:
(1) Operating at low compressor speed,
(2) Operating the lower capacity compressor,
(3) Operating Compressor #1, or
(4) Operating with the compressor unloaded (
For such systems, high capacity means:
(1) Operating at high compressor speed,
(2) Operating the higher capacity compressor,
(3) Operating Compressors #1 and #2, or
(4) Operating with the compressor loaded (
1.46Two-capacity, northern heat pump means a heat pump that has a factory or field-selectable lock-out feature to prevent space cooling at high-capacity. Two-capacity heat pumps having this feature will typically have two sets of ratings, one with the feature disabled and one with the feature enabled. The indoor coil model number should reflect whether the ratings pertain to the lockout enabled option via the inclusion of an extra identifier, such as “+LO.” When testing as a two-capacity, northern heat pump, the lockout feature must remain enabled for all tests.
1.47Wet-coil test means a test conducted at test conditions that typically cause water vapor to condense on the test unit evaporator coil.
This test procedure covers split-type and single-packaged ducted units and split-type non-ducted units. Except for units having a variable-speed compressor, ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed are covered.
a. Only a subset of the sections listed in this test procedure apply when testing and rating a particular unit. Tables 1-A through 1-C show which sections of the test procedure apply to each type of equipment. In each table, look at all four of the Roman numeral categories to see what test sections apply to the equipment being tested.
1. The first category, Rows I-1 through I-4 of the Tables, pertains to the compressor and indoor fan features of the equipment. After identifying the correct “I” row, find the table cells in the same row that list the type of equipment being tested: Air conditioner (AC), heat pump (HP), or heating-only heat pump (HH). Use the test section(s) listed above each noted table cell for testing and rating the unit.
2. The second category, Rows II-1 and II-2, pertains to the presence or absence of ducts. Row II-1 shows the test procedure sections that apply to ducted systems, and Row II-2 shows those that apply to non-ducted systems.
3. The third category is for special features that may be present in the equipment. When testing units that have one or more of the three (special) equipment features described by the Table legend for Category III, use Row III to find test sections that apply.
4. The fourth category is for the secondary test method to be used. If the secondary method for determining the unit's cooling and/or heating capacity is known, use Row IV to find the appropriate test sections. Otherwise, include all of the test sections referenced by Row IV cell entries—
b. Obtain a complete listing of all pertinent test sections by recording those sections identified from the four categories above.
c. The user should note that, for many sections, only part of a section applies to the unit being tested. In a few cases, the entire section may not apply. For example, sections 3.4 to 3.5.3 (which describe optional dry coil tests), are not relevant if the allowed default value for the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient is used rather than determining it by testing.
Equipment Description: A ducted air conditioner having a single-speed compressor, a fixed-speed indoor fan, and a multi-speed outdoor fan.
Secondary Test Method: Refrigerant Enthalpy Method
Step 1. Determine which of four listed Row “I” options applies ==> Row I-2
Table 1-A: “AC” in Row I-2 is found in the columns for sections 1.1 to 1.47, 2.1 to 2.2, 2.2.4 to 2.2.4.1, 2.2.5, 2.3 to 2.3.1, 2.4 to 2.4.1, 2.5, 2.5.2 to 2.10, and 2.11 to 2.13.
Table 1-B: “AC” is listed in Row I-2 for sections 3 to 3.1.4, 3.1.5 to 3.1.8, 3.2.1, 3.3 to 3.5, 3.5.3, 3.11 and 3.12.
Table 1-C: “AC” is listed in Row I-2 for sections 4.1.1 and 4.4.
Step 2. Equipment is ducted ==> Row II-1
Table 1-A: “AC” is listed in Row II-1 for sections 2.4.2 and 2.5.1 to 2.5.1.2.
Table 1-B: “AC” is listed in Row II-1 for sections 3.1.4.1 to 3.1.4.1.1 and 3.5.1.
Table 1-C: no “AC” listings in Row II-1.
Step 3. Equipment Special Features include multi-speed outdoor fan ==> Row III, M
Table 1-A: “M” is listed in Row III for section 2.2.2
Tables 1-B and 1-C: no “M” listings in Row III.
Step 4. Secondary Test Method is Refrigerant Enthalpy Method ==> Row IV, R
Table 1-A: “R” is listed in Row IV for section 2.10.3
Table 1-B: “R” is listed in Row IV for section 3.11.3
Table 1-C: no “R” listings in Row IV.
Step 5. Cumulative listing of applicable test procedure sections 1.1 to 1.47, 2.1 to 2.2, 2.2.2, 2.2.4 to 2.4.1, 2.2.5, 2.3 to 2.3.1, 2.4 to 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.5, 2.5.1 to 2.5.1.2, 2.5.2 to 2.10, 2.10.3, 2.11 to 2.13, 3. to 3.1.4, 3.1.4.1 to 3.1.4.1.1, 3.1.5 to 3.1.8, 3.2.1, 3.3 to 3.5, 3.5.1, 3.5.3, 3.11, 3.11.3, 3.12, 4.1.1, and 4.4.
2.1Test room requirements. a. Test using two side-by-side rooms, an indoor test room and an outdoor test room. For multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps (see Definition 1.30), however, use as many available indoor test rooms as needed to accommodate the total number of indoor units. These rooms must comply with the requirements specified in sections 8.1.2 and 8.1.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
b. Inside these test rooms, use artificial loads during cyclic tests and frost accumulation tests, if needed, to produce stabilized room air temperatures. For one room, select an electric resistance heater(s) having a heating capacity that is approximately equal to the heating capacity of the test unit's condenser. For the second room, select a heater(s) having a capacity that is close to the sensible cooling capacity of the test unit's evaporator. When applied, cycle the heater located in the same room as the test
2.2Test unit installation requirements. a. Install the unit according to section 8.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). With respect to interconnecting tubing used when testing split systems, however, follow the requirements given in section 6.1.3.5 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). When testing triple-split systems (see Definition 1.44), use the tubing length specified in section 6.1.3.5 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) to connect the outdoor coil, indoor compressor section, and indoor coil while still meeting the requirement of exposing 10 feet of the tubing to outside conditions. When testing split systems having multiple indoor coils, connect each indoor fan-coil to the outdoor unit using: (a) 25 feet of tubing, or (b) tubing furnished by the manufacturer, whichever is longer. If they are needed to make a secondary measurement of capacity, install refrigerant pressure measuring instruments as described in section 8.2.5 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Refer to section 2.10 of this appendix to learn which secondary methods require refrigerant pressure measurements. At a minimum, insulate the low-pressure line(s) of a split-system with insulation having an inside diameter that matches the refrigerant tubing and a nominal thickness of 0.5 inch.
b. For units designed for both horizontal and vertical installation or for both up-flow and down-flow vertical installations, the manufacturer must specify the orientation used for testing. Conduct testing with the following installed:
(1) the most restrictive filter(s);
(2) supplementary heating coils; and
(3) other equipment specified as part of the unit, including all hardware used by a heat comfort controller if so equipped (see Definition 1.28). For small-duct, high-velocity systems, configure all balance dampers or restrictor devices on or inside the unit to fully open or lowest restriction.
c. Testing a ducted unit without having an indoor air filter installed is permissible as long as the minimum external static pressure requirement is adjusted as stated in Table 2, note 3 (see section 3.1.4). Except as noted in section 3.1.9, prevent the indoor air supplementary heating coils from operating during all tests. For coil-only indoor units that are supplied without an enclosure, create an enclosure using 1 inch fiberglass ductboard having a nominal density of 6 pounds per cubic foot. Or alternatively, use some other insulating material having a thermal resistance (“R” value) between 4 and 6 hr·ft
2.2.1Defrost control settings. Set heat pump defrost controls at the normal settings which most typify those encountered in generalized climatic region IV. (Refer to Figure 2 and Table 17 of section 4.2 for information on region IV.) For heat pumps that use a time-adaptive defrost control system (see Definition 1.42), the manufacturer must specify the frosting interval to be used during Frost Accumulation tests and provide the procedure for manually initiating the defrost at the specified time. To ease testing of any unit, the manufacturer should provide information and any necessary hardware to manually initiate a defrost cycle.
2.2.2Special requirements for units having a multiple-speed outdoor fan. Configure the multiple-speed outdoor fan according to the manufacturer's specifications, and thereafter, leave it unchanged for all tests. The controls of the unit must regulate the operation of the outdoor fan during all lab tests except dry coil cooling mode tests. For dry coil cooling mode tests, the outdoor fan must operate at the same speed used during the required wet coil test conducted at the same outdoor test conditions.
2.2.3Special requirements for multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps, and systems composed of multiple mini-split units (outdoor units located side-by-side) that would normally operate using two or more indoor thermostats. For any test where the system is operated at part load (i.e., one or more compressors “off”, operating at the intermediate or minimum compressor speed, or at low compressor capacity), the manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor coils that are turned off during the test. For variable-speed systems, the manufacturer must designate at least one indoor unit that is turned off for all tests conducted at minimum compressor speed. For all other part-load tests, the manufacturer shall choose to turn off zero, one, two, or more indoor units. The chosen configuration shall remain unchanged for all tests conducted at the same compressor speed/capacity. For any indoor coil that is turned off during a test, take steps to cease forced airflow through this indoor coil and block its outlet duct. Because these types of systems will have more than one indoor fan and possibly multiple outdoor fans and compressor systems, references in this test procedure to a single indoor fan, outdoor fan, and compressor means all indoor fans, all outdoor fans, and all compressor systems that are turned on during the test.
2.2.4Wet-bulb temperature requirements for the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils.
2.2.4.1Cooling mode tests. For wet-coil cooling mode tests, regulate the water vapor
(1) Units that reject condensate to the outdoor coil during wet coil tests. Tables 3-6 list the applicable wet-bulb temperatures.
(2) Single-packaged units where all or part of the indoor section is located in the outdoor test room. The average dew point temperature of the air entering the outdoor coil during wet coil tests must be within ±3.0 °F of the average dew point temperature of the air entering the indoor coil over the 30-minute data collection interval described in section 3.3. For dry coil tests on such units, it may be necessary to limit the moisture content of the air entering the outdoor side of the unit to meet the requirements of section 3.4.
2.2.4.2Heating mode tests. For heating mode tests, regulate the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor unit to the applicable wet-bulb temperature listed in Tables 9 to 12. The wet-bulb temperature entering the indoor side of the heat pump must not exceed 60 °F. Additionally, if the Outdoor Air Enthalpy test method is used while testing a single-packaged heat pump where all or part of the outdoor section is located in the indoor test room, adjust the wet-bulb temperature for the air entering the indoor side to yield an indoor-side dew point temperature that is as close as reasonably possible to the dew point temperature of the outdoor-side entering air.
2.2.5Additional refrigerant charging requirements. Charging according to the “manufacturer's published instructions,” as stated in section 8.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), means the manufacturer's installation instructions that come packaged with the unit.If a unit requires charging but the installation instructions do not specify a charging procedure, then evacuate the unit and add the nameplate refrigerant charge. Where the manufacturer's installation instructions contain two sets of refrigerant charging criteria, one for field installations and one for lab testing, use the field installation criteria. For third-party testing, the test laboratory may consult with the manufacturer about the refrigerant charging procedure and make any needed corrections so long as they do not contradict the published installation instructions. The manufacturer may specify an alternative charging criteria to the third-party laboratory so long as the manufacturer thereafter revises the published installation instructions accordingly.
2.3Indoor air volume rates. If a unit's controls allow for overspeeding the indoor fan (usually on a temporary basis), take the necessary steps to prevent overspeeding during all tests.
2.3.1Cooling tests. a. Set indoor fan control options (
b. Express the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate, and the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate in terms of standard air.
2.3.2Heating tests. a. If needed, set the indoor fan control options (
b. Express the Heating Certified Air Volume Rate, the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate, the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate, and the Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate in terms of standard air.
2.4Indoor coil inlet and outlet duct connections. Insulate and/or construct the outlet plenum described in section 2.4.1 and, if installed, the inlet plenum described in section 2.4.2 with thermal insulation having a nominal overall sistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr·ft
2.4.1Outlet plenum for the indoor unit. a. Attach a plenum to the outlet of the indoor coil. (
b. For systems having multiple indoor coils, attach a plenum to each indoor coil outlet. Connect two or more outlet plenums to a single common duct so that each indoor coil ultimately connects to an airflow measuring apparatus (section 2.6). If using more than one indoor test room, do likewise, creating one or more common ducts within each test room that contains multiple indoor coils. At the plane where each plenum enters a common duct, install an adjustable airflow damper and use it to equalize the static pressure in each plenum. Each outlet air temperature grid (section 2.5.4) and airflow measuring apparatus are located downstream of the inlet(s) to the common duct.
c. For small-duct, high-velocity systems, install an outlet plenum that has a diameter that is equal to or less than the value listed below. The limit depends only on the cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate (see section 3.1.4.1.1) and is effective regardless of the flange dimensions on the outlet of the unit (or an air supply plenum adapter accessory, if installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions).
d. Add a static pressure tap to each face of the (each) outlet plenum, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference of an oval or round plenum. Create a manifold that connects the four static pressure taps. Figure 1 shows two of the three options allowed for the manifold configuration; the third option is the broken-ring, four-to-one manifold configuration that is shown in Figure 7a of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). See Figures 7a, 7b, 7c, and 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for the cross-sectional dimensions and minimum length of the (each) plenum and the locations for adding the static pressure taps for units tested with and without an indoor fan installed.
2.4.2Inlet plenum for the indoor unit. Install an inlet plenum when testing a coil-only indoor unit or a packaged system where the indoor coil is located in the outdoor test room. Add static pressure taps at the center of each face of this plenum, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference of an oval or round plenum. Make a manifold that connects the four static-pressure taps using one of the three configurations specified in section 2.4.1. See Figures 7b, 7c, and Figure 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for cross-sectional dimensions, the minimum length of the inlet plenum, and the locations of the static-pressure taps. When testing a ducted unit having an indoor fan (and the indoor coil is in the indoor test room), the manufacturer has the option to test with or without an inlet plenum installed. Space limitations within the test room may dictate that the manufacturer choose the latter option. If used, construct the inlet plenum and add the four static-pressure taps as shown in Figure 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Manifold the four static-pressure taps using one of the three configurations specified in section 2.4.1. Never use an inlet plenum when testing a non-ducted system.
2.5Indoor coil air property measurements and air damper box applications. a. Measure the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering and leaving the indoor coil. If needed, use an air sampling device to divert air to a sensor(s) that measures the water vapor content of the air. See Figure 2 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for guidance on constructing an air sampling device. The sampling device may also divert air to a remotely located sensor(s) that measures dry bulb temperature. The air sampling device and the remotely located temperature sensor(s) may be used to determine the entering air dry bulb temperature during any test. The air sampling device and the remotely located leaving air dry bulb temperature sensor(s) may be used for all tests except:
(1) Cyclic tests; and
(2) Frost accumulation tests.
b. An acceptable alternative in all cases, including the two special cases noted above, is to install a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors within the outlet and inlet ducts. Use a temperature grid to get the average dry bulb temperature at one location, leaving or entering, or when two grids are applied as a thermopile, to directly obtain the temperature difference. A grid of temperature sensors (which may also be used for determining average leaving air dry bulb temperature) is required to measure the temperature distribution within a cross-section of the leaving airstream.
c. Use an inlet and outlet air damper box when testing ducted systems if conducting one or both of the cyclic tests listed in sections 3.2 and 3.6. Otherwise, install an outlet air damper box when testing heat pumps, both ducted and non-ducted, that cycle off the indoor fan during defrost cycles if no other means is available for preventing natural or forced convection through the indoor unit when the indoor fan is off. Never use an inlet damper box when testing a non-ducted system.
2.5.1Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor coil: for cases where the inlet damper box is installed. a. Install the inlet side damper box as specified in section 2.5.1.1 or 2.5.1.2, whichever applies. Insulate or construct the ductwork between the point where the air damper is installed and where the connection is made to either the inlet plenum (section 2.5.1.1 units) or the indoor unit (section 2.5.1.2 units) with thermal insulation that has a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr·ft
b. Locate the grid of entering air dry-bulb temperature sensors, if used, at the inlet of the damper box. Locate the air sampling device, or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air, at a location immediately upstream of the damper box inlet.
2.5.1.1If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is installed. Install the inlet damper box upstream of the inlet plenum. The cross-sectional flow area of the damper box must be
2.5.1.2If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not installed. Install the damper box immediately upstream of the air inlet of the indoor unit. The cross-sectional dimensions of the damper box must be equal to or greater than the dimensions of the indoor unit inlet. If needed, use an adaptor plate or a short transition duct section to connect the damper box with the unit's air inlet. Add static pressure taps at the center of each face of the damper box, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference, if oval or round. Locate the pressure taps between the inlet damper and the inlet of the indoor unit. Make a manifold that connects the four static pressure taps.
2.5.2Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor unit: for cases where no inlet damper box is installed. If using the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum and a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors, mount the grid at a location upstream of the static pressure taps described in section 2.4.2, preferably at the entrance plane of the inlet plenum. If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not used, but a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors is used, locate the grid approximately 6 inches upstream from the inlet of the indoor coil. Or, in the case of non-ducted units having multiple indoor coils, locate a grid approximately 6 inches upstream from the inlet of each indoor coil. Position an air sampling device, or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air, immediately upstream of the (each) entering air dry-bulb temperature sensor grid. If a grid of sensors is not used, position the entering air sampling device (or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air) as if the grid were present.
2.5.3Indoor coil static pressure difference measurement. Section 6.5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) describes the method for fabricating static-pressure taps. Also refer to Figure 2A of ASHRAE Standard 51-99/AMCA Standard 210-99 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Use a differential pressure measuring instrument that is accurate to within ±0.01 inches of water and has a resolution of at least 0.01 inches of water to measure the static pressure difference between the indoor coil air inlet and outlet. Connect one side of the differential pressure instrument to the manifolded pressure taps installed in the outlet plenum. Connect the other side of the instrument to the manifolded pressure taps located in either the inlet plenum or incorporated within the air damper box. If an inlet plenum or inlet damper box are not used, leave the inlet side of the differential pressure instrument open to the surrounding atmosphere. For non-ducted systems that are tested with multiple outlet plenums, measure the static pressure within each outlet plenum relative to the surrounding atmosphere.
2.5.4Test set-up on the outlet side of the indoor coil. a. Install an interconnecting duct between the outlet plenum described in section 2.4.1 and the airflow measuring apparatus described below in section 2.6. The cross-sectional flow area of the interconnecting duct must be equal to or greater than the flow area of the outlet plenum or the common duct used when testing non-ducted units having multiple indoor coils. If needed, use adaptor plates or transition duct sections to allow the connections. To minimize leakage, tape joints within the interconnecting duct (and the outlet plenum). Construct or insulate the entire flow section with thermal insulation having a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr·ft
b. Install a grid(s) of dry-bulb temperature sensors inside the interconnecting duct. Also, install an air sampling device, or the sensor(s) used to measure the water vapor content of the outlet air, inside the interconnecting duct. Locate the dry-bulb temperature grid(s) upstream of the air sampling device (or the in-duct sensor(s) used to measure the water vapor content of the outlet air). Air that circulates through an air sampling device and past a remote water-vapor-content sensor(s) must be returned to the interconnecting duct at a point:
(1) Downstream of the air sampling device;
(2) Upstream of the outlet air damper box, if installed; and
(3) Upstream of the section 2.6 airflow measuring apparatus.
2.5.4.1Outlet air damper box placement and requirements. If using an outlet air damper box (see section 2.5), install it within the interconnecting duct at a location downstream of the location where air from the sampling device is reintroduced or downstream of the in-duct sensor that measures water vapor content of the outlet air. The leakage rate from the combination of the outlet plenum, the closed damper, and the duct section that connects these two components must not exceed 20 cubic feet per minute when a negative pressure of 1 inch of water column is maintained at the plenum's inlet.
2.5.4.2Procedures to minimize temperature maldistribution. Use these procedures if necessary to correct temperature maldistributions. Install a mixing device(s) upstream of the outlet air, dry-bulb temperature grid (but downstream of the outlet plenum static pressure taps). Use a perforated screen located between the mixing device and the dry-bulb temperature grid, with a maximum open area of 40 percent. One or both items should help to meet the maximum outlet air temperature distribution
2.5.4.3Minimizing air leakage. For small-duct, high-velocity systems, install an air damper near the end of the interconnecting duct, just prior to the transition to the airflow measuring apparatus of section 2.6. To minimize air leakage, adjust this damper such that the pressure in the receiving chamber of the airflow measuring apparatus is no more than 0.5 inch of water higher than the surrounding test room ambient. In lieu of installing a separate damper, use the outlet air damper box of sections 2.5 and 2.5.4.1 if it allows variable positioning. Also apply these steps to any conventional indoor blower unit that creates a static pressure within the receiving chamber of the airflow measuring apparatus that exceeds the test room ambient pressure by more than 0.5 inches of water column.
2.5.5Dry bulb temperature measurement. a. Measure dry bulb temperatures as specified in sections 4, 5, 6.1-6.10, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). The transient testing requirements cited in section 4.3 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) apply if conducting a cyclic or frost accumulation test.
b. Distribute the sensors of a dry-bulb temperature grid over the entire flow area. The required minimum is 9 sensors per grid.
2.5.6Water vapor content measurement. Determine water vapor content by measuring dry-bulb temperature combined with the air wet-bulb temperature, dew point temperature, or relative humidity. If used, construct and apply wet-bulb temperature sensors as specified in sections 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). As specified in ASHRAE 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), the temperature sensor (wick removed) must be accurate to within ±0.2 °F. If used, apply dew point hygrometers as specified in sections 5 and 8 of ASHRAE Standard 41.6-94 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). The dew point hygrometers must be accurate to within ±0.4 °F when operated at conditions that result in the evaluation of dew points above 35 °F. If used, a relative humidity (RH) meter must be accurate to within ±0.7% RH. Other means to determine the psychrometric state of air may be used as long as the measurement accuracy is equivalent to or better than the accuracy achieved from using a wet-bulb temperature sensor that meets the above specifications.
2.5.7Air damper box performance requirements. If used (see section 2.5), the air damper box(es) must be capable of being completely opened or completely closed within 10 seconds for each action.
2.6Airflow measuring apparatus. a. Fabricate and operate an Air Flow Measuring Apparatus as specified in section 6.6 of ASHRAE Standard 116-95 (RA05) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Refer to Figure 12 of ASHRAE Standard 51-99/AMCA Standard 210-99 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) or Figure 14 of ASHRAE Standard 41.2-87 (RA 92) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for guidance on placing the static pressure taps and positioning the diffusion baffle (settling means) relative to the chamber inlet.
b. Connect the airflow measuring apparatus to the interconnecting duct section described in section 2.5.4. See sections 6.1.1, 6.1.2, and 6.1.4, and Figures 1, 2, and 4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), and Figures D1, D2, and D4 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for illustrative examples of how the test apparatus may be applied within a complete laboratory set-up. Instead of following one of these examples, an alternative set-up may be used to handle the air leaving the airflow measuring apparatus and to supply properly conditioned air to the test unit's inlet. The alternative set-up, however, must not interfere with the prescribed means for measuring airflow rate, inlet and outlet air temperatures, inlet and outlet water vapor contents, and external static pressures, nor create abnormal conditions surrounding the test unit. (Note: Do not use an enclosure as described in section 6.1.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) when testing triple-split units.)
2.7Electrical voltage supply. Perform all tests at the voltage specified in section 6.1.3.2 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for “Standard Rating Tests.” Measure the supply voltage at the terminals on the test unit using a volt meter that provides a reading that is accurate to within ±1.0 percent of the measured quantity.
2.8Electrical power and energy measurements. a. Use an integrating power (watt-hour) measuring system to determine the electrical energy or average electrical power supplied to all components of the air conditioner or heat pump (including auxiliary components such as controls, transformers, crankcase heater, integral condensate pump on non-ducted indoor units, etc.). The watt-hour measuring system must give readings that are accurate to within ±0.5 percent. For cyclic tests, this accuracy is required during both the ON and OFF cycles. Use either two different scales on the same watt-hour meter or two separate watt-hour meters. Activate the scale or meter having the lower power rating within 15 seconds after beginning an
b. When performing section 3.5 and/or 3.8 cyclic tests on non-ducted units, provide instrumentation to determine the average electrical power consumption of the indoor fan motor to within ±1.0 percent. If required according to sections 3.3, 3.4, 3.7, 3.9.1, and/or 3.10, this same instrumentation requirement applies when testing air conditioners and heat pumps having a variable-speed constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan or a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
2.9Time measurements. Make elapsed time measurements using an instrument that yields readings accurate to within ±0.2 percent.
2.10Test apparatus for the secondary space conditioning capacity measurement. For all tests, use the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method to measure the unit's capacity. This method uses the test set-up specified in sections 2.4 to 2.6. In addition, for all steady-state tests, conduct a second, independent measurement of capacity as described in section 3.1.1. For split systems, use one of the following secondary measurement methods: Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, Compressor Calibration Method, or Refrigerant Enthalpy Method. For single packaged units, use either the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method or the Compressor Calibration Method as the secondary measurement.
2.10.1Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method. a. To make a secondary measurement of indoor space conditioning capacity using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, do the following:
(1) Measure the electrical power consumption of the test unit;
(2) Measure the air-side capacity at the outdoor coil; and
(3) Apply a heat balance on the refrigerant cycle.
b. The test apparatus required for the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method is a subset of the apparatus used for the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method. Required apparatus includes the following:
(1) An outlet plenum containing static pressure taps (sections 2.4, 2.4.1, and 2.5.3),
(2) An airflow measuring apparatus (section 2.6),
(3) A duct section that connects these two components and itself contains the instrumentation for measuring the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air leaving the outdoor coil (sections 2.5.4, 2.5.5, and 2.5.6), and
(4) On the inlet side, a sampling device and optional temperature grid (sections 2.5 and 2.5.2).
c. During the preliminary tests described in sections 3.11.1 and 3.11.1.1, measure the evaporator and condenser temperatures or pressures. On both the outdoor coil and the indoor coil, solder a thermocouple onto a return bend located at or near the midpoint of each coil or at points not affected by vapor superheat or liquid subcooling. Alternatively, if the test unit is not sensitive to the refrigerant charge, connect pressure gages to the access valves or to ports created from tapping into the suction and discharge lines. Use this alternative approach when testing a unit charged with a zeotropic refrigerant having a temperature glide in excess of 1 °F at the specified test conditions.
2.10.2Compressor Calibration Method. Measure refrigerant pressures and temperatures to determine the evaporator superheat and the enthalpy of the refrigerant that enters and exits the indoor coil. Determine refrigerant flow rate or, when the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is less than 5 °F, total capacity from separate calibration tests conducted under identical operating conditions. When using this method, install instrumentation, measure refrigerant properties, and adjust the refrigerant charge according to section 7.4.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Use refrigerant temperature and pressure measuring instruments that meet the specifications given in sections 5.1.1 and 5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
2.10.3Refrigerant Enthalpy Method. For this method, calculate space conditioning capacity by determining the refrigerant enthalpy change for the indoor coil and directly measuring the refrigerant flow rate. Use section 7.5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for the requirements for this method, including the additional instrumentation requirements, and information on placing the flow meter and a sight glass. Use refrigerant temperature, pressure, and flow measuring instruments that meet the specifications given in sections 5.1.1, 5.2, and 5.5.1 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
2.11Measurement of test room ambient conditions. a. If using a test set-up where air is ducted directly from the conditioning apparatus to the indoor coil inlet (see Figure 2, Loop Air-Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22)), add instrumentation to permit measurement of the indoor test room dry-bulb temperature.
b. If the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method is not used, add instrumentation to measure the dry-bulb temperature and the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. If an air sampling device is used, construct and apply the device as per section 6 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Take steps (
c. Measure dry bulb temperatures as specified in sections 4, 5, 6.1-6.10, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Measure water vapor content as stated above in section 2.5.6.
2.12Measurement of indoor fan speed. When required, measure fan speed using a revolution counter, tachometer, or stroboscope that gives readings accurate to within ±1.0 percent.
2.13Measurement of barometric pressure. Determine the average barometric pressure during each test. Use an instrument that meets the requirements specified in section 5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005(incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
3.1General Requirements. If, during the testing process, an equipment set-up adjustment is made that would alter the performance of the unit when conducting an already completed test, then repeat all tests affected by the adjustment. For cyclic tests, instead of maintaining an air volume rate, for each airflow nozzle, maintain the static pressure difference or velocity pressure during an ON period at the same pressure difference or velocity pressure as measured during the steady-state test conducted at the same test conditions.
3.1.1Primary and secondary test methods. For all tests, use the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method test apparatus to determine the unit's space conditioning capacity. The procedure and data collected, however, differ slightly depending upon whether the test is a steady-state test, a cyclic test, or a frost accumulation test. The following sections described these differences. For all steady-state tests (
3.1.2Manufacturer-provided equipment overrides. Where needed, the manufacturer must provide a means for overriding the controls of the test unit so that the compressor(s) operates at the specified speed or capacity and the indoor fan operates at the specified speed or delivers the specified air volume rate.
3.1.3Airflow through the outdoor coil. For all tests, meet the requirements given in section 6.1.3.4 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006(incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) when obtaining the airflow through the outdoor coil.
3.1.4Airflow through the indoor coil.
3.1.4.1Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.1.1Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate for Ducted Units. The manufacturer must specify the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. Use this value as long as the following two requirements are satisfied. First, when conducting the A or A
a. For all ducted units tested with an indoor fan installed, except those having a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan. The second requirement applies exclusively to the A or A
1. Achieve the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, determined in accordance with the previous paragraph;
2. Measure the external static pressure;
3. If this pressure is equal to or greater than the applicable minimum external static pressure cited in Table 2, this second requirement is satisfied. Use the current air volume rate for all tests that require the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
4. If the Table 2 minimum is not equaled or exceeded,
4a. reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled or
4b. until the measured air volume rate equals 95 percent of the air volume rate from step 1, whichever occurs first.
5. If the conditions of step 4a occur first, this second requirement is satisfied. Use the
6. If the conditions of step 4b occur first, make an incremental change to the set-up of the indoor fan (e.g., next highest fan motor pin setting, next highest fan motor speed) and repeat the evaluation process beginning at above step 1. If the indoor fan set-up cannot be further changed, reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
b. For ducted units that are tested with a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed.For all tests that specify the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, obtain an external static pressure as close to (but not less than) the applicable Table 2 value that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower.
c. For ducted units that are tested without an indoor fan installed. For the A or A
3.1.4.1.2Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate for Non-ducted Units. For non-ducted units, the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit is operated at an external static pressure of zero inches of water.
3.1.4.2Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted units that regulate the speed (as opposed to the cfm) of the indoor fan,
b. For ducted units that regulate the air volume rate provided by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate. For such systems, conduct all tests that specify the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate—(
c. For ducted two-capacity units that are tested without an indoor fan installed, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate is the
d. For non-ducted units, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the indoor fan setting used at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system) or minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system). For units having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan, use the lowest fan setting allowed for cooling.
3.1.4.3Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted units that regulate the speed of the indoor fan,
b. For ducted units that regulate the air volume rate provided by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate. For such systems, conduct the E
c. For non-ducted units, the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the fan speed selected by the controls of the unit for the E
3.1.4.4Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4.1Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rates are the same. a. Use the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate as the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate for:
1. Ducted heat pumps that operate at the same indoor fan speed during both the A (or A
2. Ducted heat pumps that regulate fan speed to deliver the same constant air volume rate during both the A (or A
3. Ducted heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed (except two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested only at low capacity cooling—see 3.1.4.4.2).
3.1.4.4.2Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Full-loadAir Volume Rates are different due to indoor fan operation. a. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the speed (as opposed to the cfm) of the indoor fan,
b. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the air volume rate delivered by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate. For such heat pumps, conduct all tests that specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than,
c. When testing ducted, two-capacity northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46), use the appropriate approach of the above two cases for units that are tested with an indoor fan installed. For coil-only (fanless) northern heat pumps, the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate is the lesser of the rate specified by the manufacturer or 133 percent of the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. For this latter case, obtain the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate regardless of the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly.
3.1.4.4.3Ducted heating-only heat pumps. The manufacturer must specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
a. For all ducted heating-only heat pumps tested with an indoor fan installed, except those having a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan. Conduct the following steps only during the first test, the H1 or H1
1. Achieve the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
2. Measure the external static pressure.
3. If this pressure is equal to or greater than the Table 2 minimum external static pressure that applies given the heating-only heat pump's rated heating capacity, use the current air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
4. If the Table 2 minimum is not equaled or exceeded,
4a. reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled or
4b. until the measured air volume rate equals 95 percent of the manufacturer-specified Full-load Air Volume Rate, whichever occurs first.
5. If the conditions of step 4a occurs first, use the step 4a reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
6. If the conditions of step 4b occur first, make an incremental change to the set-up of the indoor fan (e.g., next highest fan motor pin setting, next highest fan motor speed) and repeat the evaluation process beginning at above step 1. If the indoor fan set-up cannot be further changed, reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
b.For ducted heating-only heat pumps that are tested with a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed. For all tests that specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate, obtain an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than, the applicable Table 2 minimum.
c. For ducted heating-only heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed. For the H1 or H1
3.1.4.4.4Non-ducted heat pumps, including non-ducted heating-only heat pumps. For non-ducted heat pumps, the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water.
3.1.4.5Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the speed (as opposed to the cfm) of the indoor fan,
b. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the air volume rate delivered by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. For such heat pumps, conduct all tests that specify the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate—(
c. For ducted two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested with an indoor fan installed, use the appropriate approach of the above two cases.
d. For ducted two-capacity heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed, use the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate as the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. For ducted two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed, use the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate as the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. For ducted two-capacity heating-only heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed, the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate is the higher of the rate specified by the manufacturer or 75 percent of the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate. During the laboratory tests on a coil-only (fanless) unit, obtain the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate without regard to the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly.
e. For non-ducted heat pumps, the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the indoor fan setting used at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system) or minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system). For units having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan, use the lowest fan setting allowed for heating.
3.1.4.6Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the speed of the indoor fan,
For such heat pumps, obtain the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate without regard to the external static pressure.
b. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the air volume rate delivered by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate. For such heat pumps, conduct the H2
c. For non-ducted heat pumps, the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results when the heat pump operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the fan speed selected by the controls of the unit for the H2
3.1.4.7Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate. Except for the noted changes, determine the Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate using the approach described in section 3.1.4.6. Required changes include substituting “H1
3.1.5Indoor test room requirement when the air surrounding the indoor unit is not supplied from the same source as the air entering the indoor unit. If using a test set-up where air is ducted directly from the air reconditioning apparatus to the indoor coil inlet (see Figure 2, Loop Air-Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), maintain the dry bulb temperature within the test room within ±5.0 °F of the applicable sections 3.2 and 3.6 dry bulb temperature test condition for the air entering the indoor unit.
3.1.6Air volume rate calculations. For all steady-state tests and for frost accumulation (H2, H2
3.1.7Test sequence. When testing a ducted unit (except if a heating-only heat pump), conduct the A or A
3.1.8Requirement for the air temperature distribution leaving the indoor coil. For at least the first cooling mode test and the first heating mode test, monitor the temperature distribution of the air leaving the indoor coil using the grid of individual sensors described in sections 2.5 and 2.5.4. For the 30-minute data collection interval used to determine capacity, the maximum spread among the outlet dry bulb temperatures from any data sampling must not exceed 1.5 °F. Install the mixing devices described in section 2.5.4.2 to minimize the temperature spread.
3.1.9Control of auxiliary resistive heating elements. Except as noted, disable heat pump resistance elements used for heating indoor air at all times, including during defrost cycles and if they are normally regulated by a heat comfort controller. For heat pumps equipped with a heat comfort controller, enable the heat pump resistance elements only during the below-described, short test. For single-speed heat pumps covered under section 3.6.1, the short test follows the H1 or, if conducted, the H1C Test. For two-capacity heat pumps and heat pumps covered under section 3.6.2, the short test follows the H1
3.2Cooling mode tests for different types of air conditioners and heat pumps.
3.2.1Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. Conduct two steady-state wet coil tests, the A and B Tests. Use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C Test and the cyclic D Test, to determine the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, C
3.2.2Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed.
3.2.2.1Indoor fan capacity modulation that correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature. Conduct four steady-state wet coil tests: The A
3.2.2.2Indoor fan capacity modulation based on adjusting the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio. The testing requirements are the same as specified in section 3.2.1 and Table 3. Use a Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate that represents a normal residential installation. If performed, conduct the steady-state C Test and the cyclic D Test with the unit operating in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the B Test.
3.2.3Tests for a unit having a two-capacity compressor. (See Definition 1.45.) a. Conduct four steady-state wet coil tests: the A
b. For units having a variable speed indoor fan that is modulated to adjust the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio, use Cooling Full-load and Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rates that represent a normal residential installation. Additionally, if conducting the optional dry-coil tests, operate the unit in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the B
c. Test two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46) in the same way as a single speed heat pump with the unit operating exclusively at low compressor capacity (see section 3.2.1 and Table 3).
d. If a two-capacity air conditioner or heat pump locks out low-capacity operation at higher outdoor temperatures, then use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C
3.2.4Tests for a unit having a variable-speed compressor. a. Conduct five steady-state wet coil tests: The A
b. For units that modulate the indoor fan speed to adjust the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio, use Cooling Full-load, Cooling Intermediate, and Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rates that represent a normal residential installation. Additionally, if conducting the optional dry-coil tests, operate the unit in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the F
c. For multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps (except where noted), the following procedures supersede the above requirements: For all Table 6 tests specified for a minimum compressor speed, at least one indoor unit must be turned off. The manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor unit(s) that is turned off. The manufacturer must also specify the compressor speed used for the Table 6 E
3.3Test procedures for steady-state wet coil cooling mode tests (the A, A
(1) The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil,
(2) The water vapor content of the air entering the indoor coil,
(3) The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the outdoor coil, and
(4) For the section 2.2.4 cases where its control is required, the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil.
Refer to section 3.11 for additional requirements that depend on the selected secondary test method.
b. After satisfying the pretest equilibrium requirements, make the measurements specified in Table 3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) for the Indoor Air Enthalpy method and the user-selected secondary method. Except for external static pressure, make the Table 3 measurements at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Measure external static pressure every 5 minutes or less. Continue data sampling until reaching a 30-minute period (
c. Calculate indoor-side total cooling capacity as specified in sections 7.3.3.1 and 7.3.3.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Do not adjust the parameters used in calculating capacity for the permitted variations in test conditions. Evaluate air enthalpies based on the measured barometric pressure. Assign the average total space cooling capacity and electrical power consumption over the 30-minute data collection interval to the variables Q
d. For units tested without an indoor fan installed, decrease Q
d. For air conditioners and heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan, the five additional steps listed below are required if the average of the measured external static pressures exceeds the applicable sections 3.1.4 minimum (or target) external static pressure (ΔP
1. Measure the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor (E
2. After completing the 30-minute interval and while maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately ΔP
3. After re-establishing steady readings of the fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor fan power (E
4. Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor at ΔP
5. Increase the total space cooling capacity, Q
3.4Test procedures for the optional steady-state dry-coil cooling-mode tests (the C, C
a. Except for the modifications noted in this section, conduct the steady-state dry coil cooling mode tests as specified in section 3.3 for wet coil tests. Prior to recording data during the steady-state dry coil test, operate the unit at least one hour after achieving dry coil conditions. Drain the drain pan and plug the drain opening. Thereafter, the drain pan should remain completely dry.
b. Denote the resulting total space cooling capacity and electrical power derived from the test as Q
3.5Test procedures for the optional cyclic dry-coil cooling-mode tests (the D, D
b. For units having a single-speed or two-capacity compressor, cycle the compressor OFF for 24 minutes and then ON for 6 minutes (Δτ
c. Sections 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 specify airflow requirements through the indoor coil of ducted and non-ducted systems, respectively. In all cases, use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus (covered under section 2.6) along with the indoor fan of the unit, if installed and operating, to approximate a step response in the indoor coil airflow. Regulate the exhaust fan to quickly obtain and then maintain the flow nozzle static pressure difference or velocity pressure at the same value as was measured during the steady-state dry coil test. The pressure difference or velocity pressure should be within 2 percent of the value from the steady-state dry coil test within 15 seconds after airflow initiation. For units having a variable-speed indoor fan that ramps when cycling on and/or off, use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to impose a step response that begins at the initiation of ramp up and ends at the termination of ramp down.
d. For units having a variable-speed indoor fan, conduct the cyclic dry coil test using the pull-thru approach described below if any of the following occur when testing with the fan operating:
(1) The test unit automatically cycles off;
(2) Its blower motor reverses; or
(3) The unit operates for more than 30 seconds at an external static pressure that is 0.1 inches of water or more higher than the value measured during the prior steady-state test.
For the pull-thru approach, disable the indoor fan and use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to generate the specified flow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure. If the exhaust fan cannot deliver the required pressure difference because of resistance created by the unpowered blower, temporarily remove the blower.
e. After completing a minimum of two complete compressor OFF/ON cycles, determine the overall cooling delivered and total electrical energy consumption during any subsequent data collection interval where the test tolerances given in Table 8 are satisfied. If available, use electric resistance heaters (see section 2.1) to minimize the variation in the inlet air temperature.
f. With regard to the Table 8 parameters, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils during periods when air flows through the respective coils. Sample the water vapor content of the indoor coil inlet air at least every 2 minutes during periods when air flows through the coil. Record external static pressure and the air volume rate indicator (either nozzle pressure difference or velocity pressure) at least every minute during the interval that air flows through the indoor coil. (These regular measurements of the airflow rate indicator are in addition to the required measurement at 15 seconds after flow initiation.) Sample the electrical voltage at least every 2 minutes beginning 30 seconds after compressor start-up. Continue until the compressor, the outdoor fan, and the indoor fan (if it is installed and operating) cycle off.
g. For ducted units, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering (as noted above) and leaving the indoor coil. Or if using a thermopile, continuously record the difference between these two temperatures during the interval that air flows through the indoor coil. For non-ducted units, make the same dry-bulb temperature measurements beginning when the compressor cycles on and ending when indoor coil airflow ceases.
h. Integrate the electrical power over complete cycles of length Δτ
i. If the Table 8 tolerances are satisfied over the complete cycle, record the measured electrical energy consumption as e
3.5.1Procedures when testing ducted systems. The automatic controls that are normally installed with the test unit must govern the OFF/ON cycling of the air moving equipment on the indoor side (exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and, if installed, the indoor fan of the test unit). For example, for ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed but rated based on using a fan time delay relay, control the indoor coil airflow according to the rated ON and/or OFF delays provided by the relay. For ducted units having a variable-speed indoor fan that has been disabled (and possibly removed), start and stop the indoor airflow at the same instances as if the fan were enabled. For all other ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed, cycle the indoor coil airflow in unison with the cycling of the compressor. Close air dampers on the inlet (section 2.5.1) and outlet side (sections 2.5 and 2.5.4) during the OFF period. Airflow through the indoor coil should stop within 3 seconds after the automatic controls of the test unit (act to) de-energize the indoor fan. For ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed (excluding the special case where a variable-speed fan is temporarily removed), increase e
a. The product of [τ
b. The following algorithm if the indoor fan ramps its speed when cycling.
1. Measure the electrical power consumed by the variable-speed indoor fan at a minimum of three operating conditions: at the speed/air volume rate/external static pressure that was measured during the steady-state test, at operating conditions associated with the midpoint of the ramp-up interval, and at conditions associated with the midpoint of the ramp-down interval. For these measurements, the tolerances on the airflow
2. For each case, determine the fan power from measurements made over a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Approximate the electrical energy consumption of the indoor fan if it had operated during the cyclic test using all three power measurements. Assume a linear profile during the ramp intervals. The manufacturer must provide the durations of the ramp-up and ramp-down intervals. If a manufacturer-supplied ramp interval exceeds 45 seconds, use a 45-second ramp interval nonetheless when estimating the fan energy.
The manufacturer is allowed to choose option a, and forego the extra testing burden of option b, even if the unit ramps indoor fan speed when cycling.
3.5.2Procedures when testing non-ducted systems. Do not use air dampers when conducting cyclic tests on non-ducted units. Until the last OFF/ON compressor cycle, airflow through the indoor coil must cycle off and on in unison with the compressor. For the last OFF/ON compressor cycle—the one used to determine e
3.5.3Cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient calculation. Use the two optional dry-coil tests to determine the cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, C
3.6Heating mode tests for different types of heat pumps, including heating-only heat pumps.
3.6.1Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. Conduct the optional High Temperature Cyclic (H1C) Test to determine the heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, C
3.6.2Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan: capacity modulation correlates with outdoor dry bulb temperature. Conduct five tests: two High Temperature Tests (H1
3.6.3Tests for a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor (see Definition 1.45), including two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46). a. Conduct one Maximum Temperature Test (H0
1. Knowledge of the heat pump's capacity and electrical power at low compressor capacity for outdoor temperatures of 37 °F and less is needed to complete the section 4.2.3 seasonal performance calculations; and
2.The heat pump's controls allow low-capacity operation at outdoor temperatures of 37 °F and less.
If the above two conditions are met, an alternative to conducting the H2
Determine the quantities Q
b. Conduct the optional High Temperature Cyclic Test (H1C
3.6.4Tests for a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. a. Conduct one Maximum Temperature Test (H0
b. Determine the quantities Q
c. For multiple-split heat pumps (only), the following procedures supersede the above requirements. For all Table 12 tests specified for a minimum compressor speed, at least one indoor unit must be turned off. The manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor unit(s) that is turned off. The manufacturer must also specify the compressor speed used for the Table 12 H2
3.6.5Additional test for a heat pump having a heat comfort controller. Test any heat pump that has a heat comfort controller (see Definition 1.28) according to section 3.6.1, 3.6.2, or 3.6.3, whichever applies, with the heat comfort controller disabled. Additionally, conduct the abbreviated test described in section 3.1.9 with the heat comfort controller active to determine the system's maximum supply air temperature. (Note: heat pumps having a variable speed compressor and a heat comfort controller are not covered in the test procedure at this time.)
3.7Test procedures for steady-state Maximum Temperature and High Temperature heating mode tests (the H0
b. Calculate indoor-side total heating capacity as specified in sections 7.3.4.1 and 7.3.4.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Do not adjust the parameters used in calculating capacity for the permitted variations in test conditions. Assign the average space heating capacity and electrical power over the 30-minute data collection interval to the variables Q
c. For heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed, increase Q
d. If conducting the optional cyclic heating mode test, which is described in section 3.8, record the average indoor-side air volume rate, V
1. The section 3.8 cyclic test will be conducted and the heat pump has a variable-speed indoor fan that is expected to be disabled during the cyclic test; or
2. The heat pump has a (variable-speed) constant-air volume-rate indoor fan and during the steady-state test the average external static pressure (ΔP
Determine E
i. While maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately ΔP
ii. After re-establishing steady readings for fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor fan power (E
iii. Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor if the 30-minute test had been conducted at ΔP
iv. Decrease the total space heating capacity, Q
3.8Test procedures for the optional cyclic heating mode tests (the H0C
(1) When evaluating Equation 3.5-1, use the values of V
(2) Calculate Γ using,
b. For ducted heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed (excluding the special case where a variable-speed fan is temporarily removed), increase q
c. For non-ducted heat pumps, subtract the electrical energy used by the indoor fan during the 3 minutes after compressor cutoff from the non-ducted heat pump's integrated heating capacity, q
d. If a heat pump defrost cycle is manually or automatically initiated immediately prior to or during the OFF/ON cycling, operate the heat pump continuously until 10 minutes after defrost termination. After that, begin cycling the heat pump immediately or delay until the specified test conditions have been re-established. Pay attention to preventing defrosts after beginning the cycling process. For heat pumps that cycle off the indoor fan during a defrost cycle, make no effort here to restrict the air movement through the indoor coil while the fan is off. Resume the OFF/ON cycling while conducting a minimum of two complete compressor OFF/ON cycles before determining q
3.8.1Heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient calculation. Use the results from the optional cyclic test and the required steady-state test that were conducted at the same test conditions to determine the heating-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient C
Round the calculated value for C
3.9Test procedures for Frost Accumulation heating mode tests (the H2, H2
b. For heat pumps containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrosts at intervals less than one hour, the preliminary test period starts at the termination of an automatic defrost cycle and ends at the termination of the next occurring automatic defrost cycle. For heat pumps containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrosts at intervals exceeding one hour, the preliminary test period must consist of a heating interval lasting at least one hour followed by a defrost cycle that is either manually or automatically initiated. In all cases, the heat pump's own controls must govern when a defrost cycle terminates.
c. The official test period begins when the preliminary test period ends, at defrost termination. The official test period ends at the termination of the next occurring automatic defrost cycle. When testing a heat pump that uses a time-adaptive defrost control system (see Definition 1.42), however, manually initiate the defrost cycle that ends the official test period at the instant indicated by instructions provided by the manufacturer. If the heat pump has not undergone a defrost after 6 hours, immediately conclude the test and use the results from the full 6-hour period to calculate the average space heating capacity and average electrical power consumption.
For heat pumps that turn the indoor fan off during the defrost cycle, take steps to cease forced airflow through the indoor coil and block the outlet duct whenever the heat pump's controls cycle off the indoor fan. If it is installed, use the outlet damper box described in section 2.5.4.1 to affect the blocked outlet duct.
d. Defrost termination occurs when the controls of the heat pump actuate the first change in converting from defrost operation to normal heating operation. Defrost initiation occurs when the controls of the heat pump first alter its normal heating operation in order to eliminate possible accumulations of frost on the outdoor coil.
e. To constitute a valid Frost Accumulation test, satisfy the test tolerances specified in Table 15 during both the preliminary and official test periods. As noted in Table 15, test operating tolerances are specified for two sub-intervals: (1) When heating, except for the first 10 minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle (Sub-interval H, as described in Table 15) and (2) when defrosting, plus these same first 10 minutes after defrost termination (Sub-interval D, as described in Table 15). Evaluate compliance with Table 15 test condition tolerances and the majority of the test operating tolerances using the averages from measurements recorded only during Sub-interval H. Continuously record the dry bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil, and the dry bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. Sample the remaining parameters listed in Table 15 at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less.
f. For the official test period, collect and use the following data to calculate average space heating capacity and electrical power. During heating and defrosting intervals when the controls of the heat pump have the indoor fan on, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering (as noted above) and leaving the indoor coil. If using a thermopile, continuously record the difference between the leaving and entering dry-bulb temperatures during the interval(s) that air flows through the indoor coil. For heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed, determine the corresponding cumulative time (in hours) of indoor coil airflow,
3.9.1Average space heating capacity and electrical power calculations. a. Evaluate average space heating capacity, Q
To account for the effect of duct losses between the outlet of the indoor unit and the section 2.5.4 dry-bulb temperature grid, adjust Q
b. Evaluate average electrical power, E
For heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed, increase Q
c. For heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan, the five additional steps listed below are required if the average of the external static pressures measured during sub-Interval H exceeds the applicable section 3.1.4.4, 3.1.4.5, or 3.1.4.6 minimum (or targeted) external static pressure (ΔP
1. Measure the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor (E
2. After the Frost Accumulation heating mode test is completed and while maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately ΔP
3. After re-establishing steady readings for the fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor fan power (E
4. Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor had the Frost Accumulation heating mode test been conducted at ΔP
5. Decrease the total heating capacity, Q
3.9.2Demand defrost credit. a. Assign the demand defrost credit, F
b. For two-capacity heat pumps and for section 3.6.2 units, evaluate the above equation using the Δτ
3.10Test procedures for steady-state Low Temperature heating mode tests (the H3, H3
3.11Additional requirements for the secondary test methods.
3.11.1If using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method. During the “official” test, the outdoor air-side test apparatus described in section 2.10.1 is connected to the outdoor unit. To help compensate for any effect that the addition of
3.11.1.1If a preliminary test precedes the official test. a. The test conditions for the preliminary test are the same as specified for the official test. Connect the indoor air-side test apparatus to the indoor coil; disconnect the outdoor air-side test apparatus. Allow the test room reconditioning apparatus and the unit being tested to operate for at least one hour. After attaining equilibrium conditions, measure the following quantities at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less:
1. The section 2.10.1 evaporator and condenser temperatures or pressures;
2. Parameters required according to the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method.
Continue these measurements until a 30-minute period (
b. After collecting 30 minutes of steady-state data, reconnect the outdoor air-side test apparatus to the unit. Adjust the exhaust fan of the outdoor airflow measuring apparatus until averages for the evaporator and condenser temperatures, or the saturated temperatures corresponding to the measured pressures, agree within ±0.5 °F of the averages achieved when the outdoor air-side test apparatus was disconnected. Calculate the averages for the reconnected case using five or more consecutive readings taken at one minute intervals. Make these consecutive readings after re-establishing equilibrium conditions and before initiating the official test.
3.11.1.2If a preliminary test does not precede the official test. Connect the outdoor-side test apparatus to the unit. Adjust the exhaust fan of the outdoor airflow measuring apparatus to achieve the same external static pressure as measured during the prior preliminary test conducted with the unit operating in the same cooling or heating mode at the same outdoor fan speed.
3.11.1.3Official test. a. Continue (preliminary test was conducted) or begin (no preliminary test) the official test by making measurements for both the Indoor and Outdoor Air Enthalpy Methods at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Discontinue these measurement only after obtaining a 30-minute period where the specified test condition and test operating tolerances are satisfied. To constitute a valid official test:
(1) Achieve the energy balance specified in section 3.1.1; and,
(2) For cases where a preliminary test is conducted, the capacities determined using the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method from the official and preliminary test periods must agree within 2.0 percent.
b. For space cooling tests, calculate capacity from the outdoor air-enthalpy measurements as specified in sections 7.3.3.2 and 7.3.3.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Calculate heating capacity based on outdoor air-enthalpy measurements as specified in sections 7.3.4.2 and 7.3.3.4.3 of the same ASHRAE Standard. Adjust the outdoor-side capacity according to section 7.3.3.4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22) to account for line losses when testing split systems. Use the outdoor unit fan power as measured during the official test and not the value measured during the preliminary test, as described in section 8.6.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), when calculating the capacity.
3.11.2If using the Compressor Calibration Method as the secondary test method.
a. Conduct separate calibration tests using a calorimeter to determine the refrigerant flow rate. Or for cases where the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is less than 5 °F, use the calorimeter to measure total capacity rather than refrigerant flow rate. Conduct these calibration tests at the same test conditions as specified for the tests in this appendix. Operate the unit for at least one hour or until obtaining equilibrium conditions before collecting data that will be used in determining the average refrigerant flow rate or total capacity. Sample the data at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Determine average flow rate or average capacity from data sampled over a 30-minute period where the Table 7 (cooling) or the Table 13 (heating) tolerances are satisfied. Otherwise, conduct the calibration tests according to ASHRAE Standard 23-05 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), ASHRAE Standard 41.9-2000 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22), and section 7.4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
b. Calculate space cooling and space heating capacities using the compressor calibration method measurements as specified in section 7.4.5 and 7.4.6 respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
b. Calculate space cooling and space heating capacities using the compressor calibration method measurements as specified in section 7.4.5 and 7.4.6 respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
3.11.3If using the Refrigerant-Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method. Conduct this secondary method according to section 7.5 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Calculate space cooling and heating capacities using the refrigerant-enthalpy method measurements as specified in sections 7.5.4 and 7.5.5, respectively, of the same ASHRAE Standard.
3.12Rounding of space conditioning capacities for reporting purposes.
a. When reporting rated capacities, round them off as follows:
1. For capacities less than 20,000 Btu/h, round to the nearest 100 Btu/h.
2. For capacities between 20,000 and 37,999 Btu/h, round to the nearest 200 Btu/h.
3. For capacities between 38,000 and 64,999 Btu/h, round to the nearest 500 Btu/h.
b. For the capacities used to perform the section 4 calculations, however, round only to the nearest integer.
4. CALCULATIONS OF SEASONAL PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTORS
4.1Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) Calculations. SEER must be calculated as follows: For equipment covered under sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4, evaluate the seasonal energy efficiency ratio,
T
j = the bin number. For cooling season calculations, j ranges from 1 to 8.
Additionally, for sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4, use a building cooling load, BL(T
The temperatures 95 °F and 65 °F in the building load equation represent the selected outdoor design temperature and the zero-load base temperature, respectively.
4.1.1SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no
PLF(0.5) = 1 − 0.5 · C
b. Refer to section 3.3 regarding the definition and calculation of Q
1. The value calculated as per section 3.5.3; or
2. The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
4.1.2SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.1.2.1Units covered by section 3.2.2.1 where indoor fan capacity modulation correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature. The manufacturer must provide information on how the indoor air volume rate or the indoor fan speed varies over the outdoor temperature range of 67 °F to 102 °F. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the quantity q
a. For the space cooling season, assign n
b. For units where indoor fan speed is the primary control variable, FP
c. The quantities X(T
1. The value calculated as per section 3.5.3; or
2 .The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
d. Evaluate E
e. The parameters FP
4.1.2.2Units covered by section 3.2.2.2 where indoor fan capacity modulation is used to adjust the sensible to total cooling capacity ratio. Calculate SEER as specified in section 4.1.1.
4.1.3SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a two-capacity compressor. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, Q
The calculation of Equation 4.1-1 quantities q
4.1.3.1Steady-state space cooling capacity at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature T
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n
a. The value calculated according to section 3.5.3; or
b. The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
4.1.3.2Unit alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building cooling load at temperature T
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n
4.1.3.3Unit only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
Obtain the fraction bin hours for the cooling season,
a. the C
b. the section 3.5.3 default value for C
4.1.3.4Unit must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n
4.1.4SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, Q
4.1.4.1Steady-state space cooling capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature T
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n
a. The value calculated according to section 3.5.3; or
b. The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
4.1.4.2Unit operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building cooling load at temperature T
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n
For each unit, determine the coefficients A, B, and C by conducting the following calculations once:
4.1.4.3Unit must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature Tj, BL(T
4.2Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) Calculations. Unless an approved alternative rating method is used, as set forth in 10 CFR 430.24(m), subpart B, HSPF must be calculated as follows: Six generalized climatic regions are depicted in Figure 2 and otherwise defined in Table 17. For each of these regions and for each applicable standardized design heating requirement, evaluate the heating seasonal performance factor using,
Evaluate the building heating load using
Calculate the minimum and maximum design heating requirements for each generalized climatic region as follows:
1. For a single-speed heat pump tested as per section 3.6.1, Q
2. For a variable-speed heat pump, a section 3.6.2 single-speed heat pump, or a two-capacity heat pump not covered by item 3, Q
3. For two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46), Q
If the optional H1
For all heat pumps, HSPF accounts for the heating delivered and the energy consumed by auxiliary resistive elements when operating below the balance point. This condition occurs when the building load exceeds the space heating capacity of the heat pump condenser. For HSPF calculations for all heat pumps, see either section 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, or 4.2.4, whichever applies.
For heat pumps with heat comfort controllers (see Definition 1.28), HSPF also accounts for resistive heating contributed when operating above the heat-pump-plus-comfort-controller balance point as a result of maintaining a minimum supply temperature. For heat pumps having a heat comfort controller, see section 4.2.5 for the additional steps required for calculating the HSPF.
4.2.1Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
Use Equation 4.2-2 to determine BL(T
a. The value calculated according to section 3.8.1 or
b. The section 3.8.1 default value of 0.25.
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor using
Calculate Q
4.2.2Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan. The manufacturer must provide information about how the indoor air volume rate or the indoor fan speed varies over the outdoor temperature
4.2.3Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor. The calculation of the Equation 4.2-1 quantities
a. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption of the heat pump when operating at low compressor capacity and outdoor temperature T
4.2.3.1Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature T
If the optional H0C
a. The value calculated according to section 3.8.1; or
b. The section 3.8.1 default value of 0.25.
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor using
(a) The heat pump locks out low capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures and
(b) T
4.2.3.2Heat pump alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building heating load at a temperature T
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, δ′(T
4.2.3.3Heat pump only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
a. the C
b. the section 3.8.1 default value for C
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, δ (T
4.2.3.4Heat pump must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature T
4.2.4Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. Calculate HSPF using Equation 4.2-1. Evaluate the space heating capacity, Q
Use Equations 4.2.4-1 and 4.2.4-2, respectively, to calculate Q
The calculation of Equation 4.2-1 quantities
4.2.4.1Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature T
4.2.4.2Heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building heating load at a temperature T
For each temperature bin where the heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed, determine COP
For each heat pump, determine the coefficients A, B, and C by conducting the following calculations once:
4.2.4.3Heat pump must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature T
4.2.5Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller. Heat pumps having heat comfort controllers, when set to maintain a typical minimum air delivery temperature, will cause the heat pump condenser to operate less because of a greater contribution from the resistive elements. With a conventional heat pump, resistive heating is only initiated if the heat pump condenser cannot meet the building load (
4.2.5.1Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.1 (Equations 4.2.1-4 and 4.2.1-5) for each outdoor bin temperature, T
Evaluate e
Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Even though T
4.2.5.2Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan. Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.2 (Equations 4.2.2-1 and 4.2.2-2) for each outdoor bin temperature, T
Evaluate e
Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Even though T
4.2.5.3Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor. Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.3 for both high and low capacity and at each outdoor bin temperature, T
Repeat the above calculations to determine the mass flow rate (m
Evaluate e
Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Even though T
Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Even though T
Case 3. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Even though T
Case 4. For outdoor bin temperatures where T
Even though T
4.2.5.4Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. [Reserved]
4.3Calculations of the Actual and Representative Regional Annual Performance Factors for Heat Pumps.
4.3.1Calculation of actual regional annual performance factors (APF
4.3.2Calculation of representative regional annual performance factors (APF
The SEER, Q
4.4.Rounding of SEER, HSPF, and APF for reporting purposes. After calculating SEER according to section 4.1, round it off as specified in subpart B 430.23(m)(3)(i) of Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations. Round section 4.2 HSPF values and section 4.3 APF values as per § 430.23(m)(3)(ii) and (iii) of Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations.
At 72 FR 59922, Oct. 22, 2007, appendix M to subpart B of part 430 was amended; however, portions of the amendment could not be incorporated due to inaccurate amendatory instruction.
The procedures and calculations that refer to off mode energy consumption (
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
6.1
7.1
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
For boilers that employ post purge, measure the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. The time from burner OFF to combustion blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be recorded as t
8.5
10.1
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.1.1For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the average annual energy used during the heating season, E
10.2.1.2For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as:
10.2.1.3For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOH
10.2.1.4For furnaces and boilers equipped with step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the modulating operating mode (BOH
10.2.2
10.2.2.1For furnaces or boilers equipped with either two stage or step modulating controls E
10.2.3.1For furnaces or boilers equipped with two-stage controls, E
10.2.3.2For furnaces or boilers equipped with step-modulating controls, E
E
10.4
10.4.1
indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
10.4.2
10.5
10.5.1
10.6
10.6.1
10.6.2
10.6.3
10.7
10.7.1For mobile home furnaces the sales weighted average annual fossil fuel energy consumption is expressed in Btu per year and defined as:
10.7.2For mobile home furnaces the sales weighted average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as:
10.8
1.1“Air shutter” means an adjustable device for varying the size of the primary air inlet(s) to the combustion chamber power burner.
1.2“Air tube” means a tube which carries combustion air from the burner fan to the burner nozzle for combustion.
1.3“Barometic draft regulator or barometric damper” means a mechanical device designed to maintain a constant draft in a vented heater.
1.4“Draft hood” means an external device which performs the same function as an integral draft diverter, as defined in section 1.17 of this appendix.
1.5“Electro-mechanical stack damper” means a type of stack damper which is operated by electrical and/or mechanical means.
1.6“Excess air” means air which passes through the combustion chamber and the vented heater flues in excess of that which is theoretically required for complete combustion.
1.7“Flue” means a conduit between the flue outlet of a vented heater and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric damper or vent terminal through which the flue gases pass prior to the point of draft relief.
1.8“Flue damper” means a device installed between the furnace and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric draft regulator, or vent terminal which is not equipped with a draft control device, designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation and to close the venting system when the appliance is in a standby condition.
1.9“Flue gases” means reaction products resulting from the combustion of a fuel with the oxygen of the air, including the inerts and any excess air.
1.10“Flue losses” means the sum of sensible and latent heat losses above room temperature of the flue gases leaving a vented heater.
1.11“Flue outlet” means the opening provided in a vented heater for the exhaust of the flue gases from the combustion chamber.
1.12“Heat input” (Q
1.13“Heating capacity” (Q
1.14“Higher heating value” (HHV) means the heat produced per unit of fuel when complete combustion takes place at constant pressure and the products of combustion are cooled to the initial temperature of the fuel and air and when the water vapor formed during combustion is condensed. The higher heating value is usually expressed in Btu's per pound, Btu's per cubic foot for gaseous fuel, or Btu's per gallon for liquid fuel.
1.15“Induced draft” means a method of drawing air into the combustion chamber by mechanical means.
1.16“Infiltration parameter” means that portion of unconditioned outside air drawn into the heated space as a consequence of loss of conditioned air through the exhaust system of a vented heater.
1.17“Integral draft diverter” means a device which is an integral part of a vented
1.18“Manually controlled vented heaters” means either gas or oil fueled vented heaters equipped without thermostats.
1.19“Modulating control” means either a step-modulating or two-stage control.
1.20“Power burner” means a vented heater burner which supplies air for combustion at a pressure exceeding atmospheric pressure, or a burner which depends on the draft induced by a fan incorporated in the furnace for proper operation.
1.21“Reduced heat input rate” means the factory adjusted lowest reduced heat input rate for vented home heating equipment equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats.
1.22“Single stage thermostat” means a thermostat that cycles a burner at the maximum heat input rate and off.
1.23“Stack” means the portion of the exhaust system downstream of the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator.
1.24“Stack damper” means a device installed downstream of the integral draft diverter, draft hood, or barometric draft regulator, designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation and to close off the venting system when the appliance is in the standby condition.
1.25“Stack gases” means the flue gases combined with dilution air that enters at the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator.
1.26“Steady-state conditions for vented home heating equipment” means equilibrium conditions as indicated by temperature variations of not more than 5 °F (2.8C) in the flue gas temperature for units equipped with draft hoods, barometric draft regulators or direct vent systems, in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart or not more than 3 °F (1.7C) in the stack gas temperature for units equipped with integral draft diverters in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart.
1.27“Step-modulating control” means a control that either cycles off and on at the low input if the heating load is light, or gradually, increases the heat input to meet any higher heating load that cannot be met with the low firing rate.
1.28“Thermal stack damper” means a type of stack damper which is dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of thermal energy of the stack gases into movement of the damper plate.
1.29“Two stage control” means a control that either cycles a burner at the reduced heat input rate and off or cycles a burner at the maximum heat input rate and off.
1.30“Vaporizing-type oil burner” means a device with an oil vaporizing bowl or other receptacle designed to operate by vaporizing liquid fuel oil by the heat of combustion and mixing the vaporized fuel with air.
1.31“Vent/air intake terminal” means a device which is located on the outside of a building and is connected to a vented heater by a system of conduits. It is composed of an air intake terminal through which the air for combustion is taken from the outside atmosphere and a vent terminal from which flue gases are discharged.
1.32“Vent limiter” means a device which limits the flow of air from the atmospheric diaphragm chamber of a gas pressure regulator to the atmosphere. A vent limiter may be a limiting orifice or other limiting device.
1.33“Vent pipe” means the passages and conduits in a direct vent system through which gases pass from the combustion chamber to the outdoor air.
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
Attach to the outlet of vented heaters having a horizontally discharging draft diverter or draft hood outlet a 90 degree elbow, and a five (5) foot long vertical test stack. A horizontal section of pipe may be used on the floor furnace between the diverter and the elbow if necessary to clear any framing used in the installation. Use the minimum length of pipe possible for this section. Use stack, elbow, and horizontal section with same cross sectional area as the diverter outlet.
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.4
2.4.1
If a vent limiting means is provided on a gas pressure regulator, have it in place during all tests.
For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls to operate the heater at the maximum fuel input rate. Set the thermostat control to the maximum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety control valve to the “on” position. In order to prevent modulation of the burner at maximum input, place the thermostat sensing element in a temperature control bath which is held at a temperature below the maximum set point temperature of the control.
For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls to operate the heater at the reduced fuel input rate. Set the thermostat control to the minimum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety control valve to the “on” position. If ambient test room temperature is above the lowest control set point temperature, initiate burner operation by placing the thermostat sensing element in a temperature control bath that is held at a temperature below the minimum set point temperature of the control.
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
2.6.1
For units which employ a direct vent system, locate at least one thermocouple at the center of each flue way exiting the heat exchanger. Provide radiation shields if the thermocouples are exposed to burner radiation.
For units which employ a draft hood or units which employ a direct vent system which does not significantly preheat the incoming combustion air, install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel, in a horizontal plane located within 12 inches (304.8 mm) of the heater outlet and upstream of the draft hood on units so equipped. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the pipe and the pipe wall.
For units which employ direct vent systems that significantly preheat the incoming combustion air, install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel, in a plane parallel to and located within 6 inches (152.4 mm) of the vent/air intake terminal. Equalize the length of all thermocouple leads before paralleling. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the vent pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the flue pipe and the pipe wall.
Use bead-type thermocouples having wire size not greater than No. 24 American Wire Gauge (AWG). If there is a possibility that the thermocouples could receive direct radiation from the fire, install radiation shields on the fire side of the thermocouples only and position the shields so that they do not touch the thermocouple junctions.
Install thermocouples for measuring conditioned warm air temperature as described in ANSI Z21.49-1975, section 2.14. Establish the temperature of the inlet air by means of single No. 24 AWG bead-type thermocouple, suitably shielded from direct radiation and located in the center of the plane of each inlet air opening.
2.6.2
Use bead-type thermocouples having a wire size not greater than No. 24 AWG. If there is a possibility that the thermocouples could receive direct radiation from the fire, install radiation shields on the fire side of the thermocouples only and position the shields so that they do not touch the thermocouple junctions.
Install thermocouples for measuring the conditioned warm air temperature as described in sections 35.12 through 35.17 of UL 730-1974. Establish the temperature of the inlet air by means of a single No. 24 AWG bead-type thermocouple, suitably shielded from direct radiation and located in the center of the plane of each inlet air opening.
2.7
2.8
2.9
Temperature (T
2.10
3.1
3.1.1
On units employing draft diverters, measure the room temperature (T
On units employing draft hoods or direct vent systems, measure the room temperature (T
Determine the steady-state heat input rate (Q
After the above test measurements have been completed on units employing draft diverters, secure a sample of the flue gases at the exit of the heat exchanger(s) and determine the concentration of CO
For heaters with single stage thermostat control (wall mounted electric thermostats), determine the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate as specified in section 2.4 of this appendix.
For gas fueled vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats, determine the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix, and at the reduced fuel input rate, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix.
For manually controlled gas fueled vented heaters, with various input rates determine the steady-state efficiency at a fuel input rate that is within ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate. If the heater is designed to use a control that precludes operation at other than maximum output (single firing rate) determine the steady state efficiency at the maximum input rate only.
3.1.2
Do not allow smoke in the flue, for units equipped with power burners, to exceed a No. 1 smoke during the steady-state performance test as measured by the procedure described in ANSI standard Z11.182-1965 (R1971) (ASTM D 2156-65 (1970)). Maintain the average draft over the fire and in the breeching during the steady-state performance test at that recommended by the manufacturer ±0.005 inches of water gauge.
Measure the room temperature (T
For manually controlled oil fueled vented heaters, determine the steady-state efficiency at a fuel input rate that is within ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate.
3.1.3
3.2
3.3
For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the maximum fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the maximum fuel input rate and at the reduced fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the reduced fuel input rate.
Let the vented heater heat up to a steady-state condition. Feed a tracer gas at a constant metered rate into the stack directly above and within one foot above the stack damper. Record tracer gas flow rate and temperature. Measure the tracer gas concentration in the stack at several locations in a horizontal plane through a cross section of the stack at a point sufficiently above the stack damper to ensure that the tracer gas is well mixed in the stack.
Continuously measure the tracer gas concentration and temperature during a 10 minute cool down period. Shut the burner off and immediately begin measuring tracer gas concentration in the stack, stack temperature, room temperature, and barometric pressure. Record these values as the midpoint of each one-minute interval between burner shut down and ten minutes after burner shut down. Meter response time and sampling delay time shall be considered in timing these measurements.
3.4
3.5
3.5.1Measure the energy input rate to the pilot light (Q
3.5.2For manually controlled heaters where the pilot light is designed to be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use, that is, turning the control to the OFF position will shut off the gas supply to the burner(s) and to the pilot light, the measurement of Q
3.6
Conduct a cool down test by letting the unit heat up until steady-state conditions are reached, as indicated by temperature variation of not more than 5 °F (2.8 °C) in the flue gas temperature in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart, and then shutting the unit off with the stack or flue damper controls by-passed or adjusted so that the stack or flue damper remains open during the resulting cool down period. If a draft was maintained on oil fueled units in the flue pipe during the steady-state performance test described in section 3.1 of this appendix, maintain the same draft (within a range of −.001 to +.005 inches of water gauge of the average steady-state draft) during this cool down period.
Measure the flue gas mass flow rate (m
Within one minute after the unit is shut off to start the cool down test for determining D
Between 5 and 6 minutes after the unit is shut off to start the cool down test, measure at the exit of the heat exchanger the average flue gas temperature, T*
The rate of the flue gas mass flow through the vented heater and the factors D
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
For vented heaters equipped without an integral draft diverter, determine (L
4.1.10
For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or with step-modulating thermostats, calculate the steady-state efficiency at the reduced fuel input rate, η
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate,
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate the weighted-average steady-state efficiency in the modulating mode, η
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.1.13
4.1.14
4.1.15
4.1.16
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, η
4.1.17
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.4.1For manually controlled heaters with various input rates the weighted average steady-state efficiency (η
(1) at 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate as measured in either section 3.1.1 of this appendix for manually controlled gas vented heaters or section 3.1.2 of this appendix for manually controlled oil vented heaters, or
(2) at the minimum fuel input rate as measured in either section 3.1.1 to this appendix for manually controlled gas vented heaters or section 3.1.2 to this appendix for manually controlled oil vented heaters if the design of the heater is such that the ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate cannot be set, provided this minimum rate is no greater than
4.2.4.2For manually controlled heater with one single firing rate the weighted average steady-state efficiency is the steady-state efficiency measured at the single firing rate.
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.6.1For manually controlled vented heaters, calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as:
4.2.6.2For manually controlled vented heaters where the pilot light can be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use as described in section 3.5.2, calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as:
4.3
4.3.1
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L
For vented heaters with step-modulating thermostats, calculate L
4.3.2
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate L
4.3.3
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L
Calculate the off-cycle sensible heat loss (L
4.3.4
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L
Calculate the off-cycle infiltration heat loss (L
4.3.6
4.3.7Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency.
Calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as:
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
For vented heaters in which no draft is maintained during the steady-state or cool down tests, M
For oil fueled vented heaters in which an imposed draft is maintained, as described in section 3.6 of this appendix, M
4.5.2
For systems numbered 11 or 12: D
4.5.3
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.1.1For vented heaters equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as:
4.6.1.2For vented heaters equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOH
4.6.2
4.6.2.1For vented heaters equipped with either two stage or step modulating controls E
4.6.3
4.6.3.1For vented heaters equipped with two stage or modulating controls E
4.6.4
4.6.4.1
4.6.4.2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1Calculate the seasonal useful output of the pool heater as:
4.4.2Calculate the seasonal input to the pool heater as:
4.4.3
4.4.3.1For pool heaters employing a continuous pilot light:
4.4.3.2For pool heaters without a continuous pilot light:
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
(a) Is connected to a main power source; and
(b) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions:
(i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions.
1.20
2.
2.1
2.2
The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Any subsequent amendment to this standard by the standard setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. The test conditions for measuring standby power
3.1Active Mode Energy Efficiency Measurement
3.1.1The test method for testing the active mode energy efficiency of fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Where ANSI C82.2 references ANSI C82.1-1997, the operator shall use ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for testing low-frequency ballasts and ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for high-frequency ballasts.
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.1.3.2
3.1.3.3
3.l.4
3.1.4.1Measure the light output of the reference lamp with the reference ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 12.
3.1.4.2Measure the light output of the reference lamp with the test ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 12.
3.2.1The test for measuring standby mode energy consumption of fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
3.2.2.Send a signal to the ballast instructing it to have zero light output using the appropriate ballast communication protocol or system for the ballast being tested.
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.4.1
3.2.4.2
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.4
4.
4.1Calculate relative light output:
4.2. Determine the Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) using the following equations:
(a) Single lamp ballast
(b) Multiple lamp ballast
4.3Determine Ballast Power Factor (PF):
At 76 FR 70628, Nov. 14, 2011, appendix Q to subpart B of part 430 was amended by adding introductory text after the heading, effective Jan. 13, 2012. For the convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:
Comply with appendix Q until November 14, 2014. After this date, all fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be tested using the provisions of appendix Q1.
1.1.
1.2.
(a) Is connected to a main power source;
(b) Has been activated; and
(c) Provides 1 or more main functions.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
1.10.
1.11.
1.12.
1.13.
1.14.
1.15.
(a) Is connected to a main power source; and
(b) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions:
(i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions.
1.16.
2.1. Where ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) references ANSI C82.1-1997, the operator shall use ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for testing low-frequency ballasts and shall use ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for high-frequency ballasts. In addition, when ANSI C82.2 is referenced, ANSI C78.81-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), ANSI C82.1, ANSI C82.11-2002, and ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) shall be used instead of the versions listed as normative references in ANSI C82.2.
2.2.1. All instruments shall be as specified by ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
2.2.2.
2.2.3.
2.3.1. The ballast shall be connected to a main power source and to the fluorescent lamp load according to the manufacturer's wiring instructions and ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and ANSI C78.81-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
2.3.1.1.1. Wire lengths between the ballast and fluorescent lamp shall be the length provided by the ballast manufacturer. Wires shall be kept loose and not shortened or bundled.
2.3.1.1.1.1. If the wire lengths supplied with the ballast are of insufficient length to reach both ends of lamp, additional wire may be added. The minimal additional wire length necessary shall be added, and the additional wire shall be the same wire gauge as the wire supplied with the ballast. If no wiring is provided with the ballast, 18 gauge or thicker wire shall be used. The wires shall be separated from each other and ground to prevent parasitic capacitance for all wires used in the apparatus, including those wires from the ballast to the lamps and from the lamps to the measuring devices.
2.3.1.1.2. The fluorescent lamp shall meet the specifications of a reference lamp as defined by ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and be seasoned at least 12 hours.
2.3.1.2. The ballast shall be connected to the number of lamps equal to the maximum number of lamps the ballast is designed to operate.
2.3.1.3. The ballast shall be tested with a reference lamp of the nominal wattage listed in Table A of this section.
2.3.1.4. For ballasts that operate rapid-start lamps (commonly referred to as 8-foot high output lamps) with recessed double contact bases, a nominal overall length of 96 inches, and that operate at ambient temperatures of 20 °F or less and are used in outdoor signs (sign ballasts):
2.3.1.4.1. A T8 lamp in accordance with Table A of this section shall be used for sign ballasts that only operate T8 lamps.
2.3.1.4.2. A T12 lamp in accordance with Table A of this section shall be used for sign ballasts that only operate T12 lamps.
2.3.1.4.3. A T12 lamp in accordance with Table A of this section shall be used for sign ballasts that are capable of operating both T8 and T12 lamps.
2.3.2.1. The power analyzer shall have n+1 channels where n is the number of lamps a ballast operates.
2.3.2.2.
2.3.2.3.
2.3.2.3.1. For the lamp arc current measurement, the full transducer ratio shall be set in the power analyzer to match the current probe to the power analyzer.
2.4.1. The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). DOE further specifies that the following revisions of the normative references indicated in ANSI C82.2) should be used in place of the references directly specified in ANSI C82.2: ANSI C78.81-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), ANSI C82.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), and ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). All other normative references shall be as specified in ANSI C82.2.
2.4.2.
2.4.3.
2.5.1.
2.5.1.1. The ballast shall be connected to the appropriate fluorescent lamps and to measurement instrumentation as indicated by the Test Setup in section 2.3.
2.5.1.2. The ballast shall be operated at full output for at least 15 minutes but no longer than 1 hour until stable operating conditions are reached. After this condition is reached, concurrently measure the parameters described in sections 2.5.1.3 through 2.5.1.9.
2.5.1.2.1. Stable operating conditions are determined by measuring lamp arc voltage, current, and power once per second in accordance with the setup described in section 2.3. Once the difference between the maximum and minimum values for lamp arc voltage, current, and power do not exceed one percent over a four minute moving window, the system shall be considered stable.
2.5.1.3.
2.5.1.4.
2.5.1.5.
2.5.1.6.
2.5.1.7.
2.5.1.8.
2.5.1.9.
2.6.1. Calculate ballast luminous efficiency (BLE).
2.6.2. Calculate Power Factor (PF).
3.1. The measurement of standby mode power need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts at this time. The above statement will be removed as part of a rulemaking to amend the energy conservation standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts to account for standby mode energy consumption, and the following shall apply on the compliance date for such requirements.
3.2.1. The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with the American National Standard Institute ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Any subsequent amendment to this standard by the standard-setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. The test conditions for measuring standby power are described in sections 5, 7, and 8 of ANSI C82.2. Fluorescent lamp ballasts that are capable of connections to control devices shall be tested with all commercially available compatible control devices connected in all possible configurations. For each configuration, a separate measurement of standby power shall be made in accordance with section 3.3 of the test procedure.
3.3.1. The test for measuring standby mode energy consumption of fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
3.3.2. Send a signal to the ballast instructing it to have zero light output using the appropriate ballast communication protocol or system for the ballast being tested.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.3.4.1.
3.3.4.2.
3.3.4.3.
3.3.4.4.
At 76 FR 70628, Nov. 14, 2011, appendix Q1 to subpart B of part 430 was amended by adding introductory text after the heading, effective Jan. 13, 2012. For the convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:
Comply with appendix Q1 beginning November 14, 2014. Prior to this date, all fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be tested using the provisions of appendix Q.
1.
2.
2.1To the extent that definitions in the referenced IESNA and CIE standards do not conflict with the DOE definitions, the definitions specified in section 1.2 of IESNA LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 3.0 of IESNA LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 1.2 and the Glossary of IESNA LM-45 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), section 2 of IESNA LM-58 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), and appendix 1 of CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) shall be included.
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.1
3.2
3.3
All lumen measurements made with instruments calibrated to the devalued NIST lumen after January 1, 1996, shall be multiplied by 1.011.
4.1
4.1.1The measurement procedure shall be as described in IESNA LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), except that lamps shall be operated at the appropriate voltage and current conditions as described in ANSI C78.375 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) or ANSI C78.901 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), and lamps shall be operated using the appropriate reference ballast at input voltage specified by the reference circuit as described in ANSI C82.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). If, for a lamp, both low-frequency and high-frequency reference ballast settings are included in ANSI C78.81 or ANSI C78.901, the lamp shall be operated using the low-frequency reference ballast.
4.1.2For lamps not listed in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) nor in ANSI C78.901 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), the lamp shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
4.1.2.14-Foot medium bi-pin lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings: T10 or T12 lamps are to use 236 volts, 0.43 amps, and 439 ohms; T8 lamps are to use 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms.
4.1.2.22-Foot U-shaped lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings: T12 lamps are to use 236 volts, 0.430 amps, and 439 ohms; T8 lamps are to use 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms.
4.1.2.38-foot slimline lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
(a)
(b)
4.1.2.48-foot high output lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
(a)
(b)
4.1.2.54-foot miniature bipin standard output or high output lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
(a)
(b)
4.1.3Lamp lumen output (lumens) and lamp electrical power input (watts), at the reference condition, shall be measured and recorded. Lamp efficacy shall be determined by computing the ratio of the measured lamp lumen output and lamp electrical power input at equilibrium for the reference condition.
4.2
4.2.1The measurement procedure shall be as described in IESNA LM-45 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Lamps shall be operated at the rated voltage as defined in § 430.2.
4.2.2The test procedure shall conform with sections 5 and 9 of IESNA LM-45 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), and the lumen output of the lamp shall be determined in accordance with section 9 of IESNA LM-45. Lamp electrical power input in watts shall be measured and recorded. Lamp efficacy shall be determined by computing the ratio of the measured lamp lumen output and lamp electrical power input at equilibrium for the reference condition. The test report shall conform to section 11 of IESNA LM-45.
4.3
4.3.1The measurement procedure shall be as described in IESNA LM-20 (see 10 CFR 430.22). Lamps shall be operated at the rated voltage as defined in § 430.2.
4.3.2.Lamp lumen output shall be determined as total forward lumens, and may be measured in an integrating sphere at the reference condition in accordance with § 7.2 of IESNA LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) or from an average intensity distribution curve measured at the reference condition specified in § 6.0 of IESNA LM-20. Lamp electrical power input in watts shall be measured and recorded.
4.3.3Lamp efficacy shall be determined by computing the ratio of the measured lamp lumen output and lamp electrical power input at equilibrium for the reference condition. The test report shall conform to section 10.0 of IES LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
4.4.1The CRI shall be determined in accordance with the method specified in CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for general service fluorescent lamps. The CCT shall be determined in accordance with the method specified in IESNA LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and rounded to the nearest 10 kelvin for general service fluorescent lamps. The CCT shall be determined in accordance with the CIE 15 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for incandescent lamps. The required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization shall be conducted in accordance with the methods set forth in IESNA LM-58 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
4.4.2The test report shall include a description of the test conditions, equipment, measured lamps, spectroradiometric measurement results, and CRI and CCT determinations.
4.5
4.5.1The CRI shall be determined in accordance with the method specified in CIE Publication 13.2 for general service fluorescent lamps. The required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization shall be conducted in accordance with the methods given in IESNA LM-58 and IESNA LM-16 (see 10 CFR 430.22).
4.5.2The test report shall include a description of the test conditions, equipment, measured lamps, spectroradiometric measurement results and CRI determination.
1.
a. Faucets—The test procedures to measure the water flow rate for faucets, expressed in gallons per minute (gpm) and liters per minute (L/min), or gallons per cycle (gal/cycle) and liters per cycle (L/cycle), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 6.5, Flow Capacity Test, of the ASME/ANSI Standard A112.18.1M-1996 (see § 430.22). Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final water consumption value shall be rounded to one decimal place for non-metered faucets, or two decimal places for metered faucets.
b. Showerheads—The test conditions to measure the water flow rate for showerheads, expressed in gallons per minute (gpm) and liters per minute (L/min), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 6.5, Flow Capacity Test, of the ASME/ANSI Standard A112.18.1M-1996 (see § 430.22). Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final water consumption value shall be rounded to one decimal place.
1.
a. The test apparatus and instructions for testing water closets shall conform to the requirements specified in section 7.1.2, Test Apparatus and General Requirements, subsections 7.1.2.1, 7.1.2.2, and 7.1.2.3 of the ASME/ANSI Standard A112.19.6-1995 (see § 430.22). Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final water consumption value shall be rounded to one decimal place.
b. The test apparatus and instructions for testing urinals shall conform to the requirements specified in section 8.2, Test Apparatus and General Requirements, subsections 8.2.1, 8.2.2, and 8.2.3 of the ASME/ANSI Standard A112.19.6-1995 (see § 430.22). Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final water consumption value shall be rounded to one decimal place.
a. Water closets—The measurement of the water flush volume for water closets, expressed in gallons per flush (gpf) and liters per flush (Lpf), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in
b. Urinals—The measurement of water flush volume for urinals, expressed in gallons per flush (gpf) and liters per flush (Lpf), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 8.5, Water Consumption, of the ASME/ANSI Standard A112.19.6-1995 (see § 430.22).
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers.
4.
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
(a) The test apparatus and instruction for testing screw base lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have medium screw base sockets shall conform to the requirements specified in section 2, “Definitions,” section 3, “Referenced Standards,” and section 4, “CFL Requirements for Testing” of DOE's “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for [Compact Fluorescent Lamps] CFLs,” Version 3.0, (Incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round off the final energy consumption value to a whole number as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers.
(b) The test apparatus and instruction for testing pin-based fluorescent lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have pin-based sockets shall conform to the requirements specified in section 1, “Definitions,” and section 3, “Energy Efficiency Specifications for Qualifying Products” of the EPA's “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Residential Light Fixtures,” Version 4.0, (Incorporated by reference, see § 430.22). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final energy consumption value shall be rounded to a whole number as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers.
4.
(a) For screw base compact fluorescent lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have medium screw base sockets, measure the efficacy, expressed in lumens per watt, in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 4, “CFL Requirements for Testing,” of the “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Compact Fluorescent Lamps,” Version 3.0 (Incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
(b) For pin-based compact fluorescent lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have pin-based sockets, measure the efficacy, expressed in lumens per watt, in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 3, “Energy-Efficiency Specifications for Qualifying Products” and Table 3 in section 4, “Qualification Process, Testing Facilities, Standards, and Documentation,” of the “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Residential Light Fixtures,” Version 4.0 (Incorporated by reference, see § 430.22).
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places or whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two decimal places or whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places or whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two decimal places
4.
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places shall be rounded up to the higher of the two decimal places; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places shall be rounded down to the lower of the two decimal places.
4.
The provisions of this appendix are effective on the compliance date of any energy conservation standard for battery chargers.
This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure battery charger energy consumption for battery chargers operating at either DC or United States AC line voltage (115V at 60Hz).
The following definitions are for the purposes of explaining the terminology associated with the test method for measuring battery charger energy consumption.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
2.10.
2.11.
2.12.
2.13.
2.14.
2.15.
2.16.
2.17.
2.18.
(1) Is connected to the main electricity supply;
(2) Is not connected to the battery; and
(3) All manual on-off switches are turned off.
2.19.
2.20.
2.21.
2.22.
(1) The battery charger is connected to the main electricity supply;
(2) The battery is not connected to the charger; and
(3) For battery chargers with manual on-off switches, all such switches are turned on.
2.23.
2.24.
The values that may be measured or calculated during the conduct of this test procedure have been summarized for easy reference in Table 3.1.
a. Measurements of active power of 0.5 W or greater shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of active power of less than 0.5 W shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 0.01 W at the 95 percent confidence level. The power measurement instrument shall, as applicable, have a resolution of:
(1) 0.01 W or better for measurements up to 10 W;
(2) 0.1 W or better for measurements of 10 to 100 W; or
(3) 1 W or better for measurements over 100 W.
b. Measurements of energy (Wh) shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of voltage and current shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 1 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of temperature shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 2 °C at the 95 percent confidence level.
c. All equipment used to conduct the tests must be selected and calibrated to ensure that measurements will meet the above uncertainty requirements. For suggestions on measuring low power levels, see IEC 62301, (Reference for guidance only, see § 430.4) especially Section 5.3.2 and Annexes B and D.
All tests, battery conditioning, and battery rest periods shall be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of ≤ 0.5 m/s. The ambient temperature shall be maintained at 20 °C ± 5 °C throughout the test. There shall be no intentional cooling of the UUT such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. The UUT shall be conditioned, rested, and tested on a thermally non-conductive surface. When not undergoing active testing, batteries shall be stored at 20 °C ± 5 °C.
a. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, it shall be tested at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, it shall not be tested.
b. If a charger is powered by a low-voltage DC or AC input, and the manufacturer packages the charger with a wall adapter, sells, or recommends an optional wall adapter capable of providing that low voltage input, then the charger shall be tested using that wall adapter and the input reference source shall be 115 V at 60 Hz. If the wall adapter cannot be operated with AC input voltage at 115 V at 60 Hz, the charger shall not be tested.
c. If the UUT is designed for operation only on DC input voltage and the provisions of paragraph 3.4 (b) above do not apply, it shall be tested with one of the following input voltages: 5.0 V DC for products drawing power from a computer USB port or the midpoint of the rated input voltage range for all other products. The input voltage shall be within ± 1 percent of the above specified voltage.
d. If the input voltage is AC, the input frequency shall be within ± 1 percent of the specified frequency. The THD of the input voltage shall be ≤ 2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The crest factor of
e. If the input voltage is DC, the AC ripple voltage (RMS) shall be:
(1) ≤ 0.2 V for DC voltages up to 10 V; or
(2) ≤ 2 percent of the DC voltage for DC voltages over 10 V.
a. The battery charger system shall be prepared and set up in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where those instructions conflict with the requirements of this test procedure. If no instructions are given, then factory or “default” settings shall be used, or where there are no indications of such settings, the UUT shall be tested in the condition as it would be supplied to an end user.
b. If the battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates (such as regular or fast charge) or different charge currents, the test shall be conducted at the fastest charge rate that is recommended by the manufacturer for everyday use, or, failing any explicit recommendation, the factory-default charge rate. If the charger has user controls for selecting special charge cycles that are recommended only for occasional use to preserve battery health, such as equalization charge, removing memory, or battery conditioning, these modes are not required to be tested. The settings of the controls shall be listed in the report for each test.
The UUT, including the battery charger and its associated battery, shall be new products of the type and condition that would be sold to a customer. If the battery is lead-acid chemistry and the battery is to be stored for more than 24 hours between its initial acquisition and testing, the battery shall be charged before such storage.
a. For chargers with integral batteries, the battery packaged with the charger shall be used for testing. For chargers with detachable batteries, the battery or batteries to be used for testing will vary depending on whether there are any batteries packaged with the battery charger.
(1) If batteries are packaged with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from the batteries packaged with the battery charger, according to the procedure in section 4.3.b.
(2) If no batteries are packaged with the charger, but the instructions specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from those recommended or specified in the instructions, according to the procedure in section 4.3.b.
(3) If no batteries are packaged with the charger and the instructions do not specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from any that are suitable for use with the charger, according to the procedure in section 4.3.b.
b. From the detachable batteries specified above, the technician shall use Table 4.1 to select the batteries to be used for testing depending on the type of charger being tested. Each row in the table represents a mutually exclusive charger type. The technician shall find the single applicable row for the UUT, and test according to those requirements.
c. A charger is considered as:
(1) Single-capacity if all associated batteries have the same rated charge capacity (see definition) and, if it is a batch charger, all configurations of the batteries have the same rated charge capacity.
(2) Multi-capacity if there are associated batteries or configurations of batteries that have different rated charge capacities.
d. The selected battery or batteries will be referred to as the “test battery” and will be used through the remainder of this test procedure.
a. If the battery charger or product containing the battery charger does not have any additional functions unrelated to battery charging, this subsection may be skipped.
b. Any optional functions controlled by the user and not associated with the battery charging process (
c. If the battery charger takes any physically separate connectors or cables not required for battery charging but associated with its other functionality (such as phone lines, serial or USB connections, Ethernet, cable TV lines,
d. Any manual on-off switches specifically associated with the battery charging process shall be switched on for the duration of the charge, maintenance, and no-battery mode tests, and switched off for the off mode test.
a. The technician may need to disassemble the end-use product or battery charger to gain access to the battery terminals for the Battery Discharge Energy Test in section 5.6. If the battery terminals are not clearly labeled, the technician shall use a voltmeter to identify the positive and negative terminals. These terminals will be the ones that give the largest voltage difference and are able to deliver significant current (0.2 C or 1/hr) into a load.
b. All conductors used for contacting the battery must be cleaned and burnished prior to connecting in order to decrease voltage drops and achieve consistent results.
c. Manufacturer's instructions for disassembly shall be followed, except those instructions that:
(1) Lead to any permanent alteration of the battery charger circuitry or function;
(2) Could alter the energy consumption of the battery charger compared to that experienced by a user during typical use,
(3) Conflict requirements of this test procedure.
d. Care shall be taken by the technician during disassembly to follow appropriate safety precautions. If the functionality of the device or its safety features is compromised, the product shall be discarded after testing.
e. Some products may include protective circuitry between the battery cells and the remainder of the device. If the manufacturer provides a description for accessing the connections at the output of the protective circuitry, these connections shall be used to discharge the battery and measure the discharge energy. The energy consumed by the protective circuitry during discharge shall not be measured or credited as battery energy.
f. If the technician, despite diligent effort and use of the manufacturer's instructions, encounters any of the following conditions noted immediately below, the Battery Discharge Energy and the Charging and Maintenance Mode Energy shall be reported as “Not Applicable”:
(1) Inability to access the battery terminals;
(2) Access to the battery terminals destroys charger functionality; or
(3) Inability to draw current from the test battery.
If there is no rating for the battery charge capacity on the battery or in the instructions, then the technician shall determine a discharge current that meets the following requirements. The battery shall be fully charged and then discharged at this constant-current rate until it reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 5.2. The discharge time must be not less than 4.5 hours nor more than 5 hours. In addition, the discharge test (Section 5.6) (which may not be starting with a fully-charged battery) shall reach the end-of-discharge voltage within 5 hours. The same discharge current shall be used for both the preparations step
For this section, the battery is considered as “fully charged” when either (a) it has been charged by the UUT until an indicator on the UUT shows that the charge is complete, or (b) it has been charged by a battery analyzer at a current not greater than the discharge current until the battery analyzer indicates that the battery is fully charged.
When there is no capacity rating, a suitable discharge current must generally be determined by trial and error. Since the conditioning step does not require constant-current discharges, the trials themselves may also be counted as part of battery conditioning.
The test sequence to measure the battery charger energy consumption is summarized in Table 5.1, and explained in detail below. Measurements shall be made under test conditions and with the equipment specified in Sections 3 and 4.
The technician shall record:
(1) The manufacturer and model of the battery charger;
(2) The presence and status of any additional functions unrelated to battery charging;
(3) The manufacturer, model, and number of batteries in the test battery;
(4) The rated battery voltage of the test battery;
(5) The rated charge capacity of the test battery; and
(6) The rated charge energy of the test battery.
(7) The settings of the controls, if battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates
a. The charging and maintenance mode test, described in detail in section 5.8, shall be 24 hours in length or longer, as determined by the items below. Proceed in order until a test duration is determined.
(1) If the battery charger has an indicator to show that the battery is fully charged, that indicator shall be used as follows: If the indicator shows that the battery is charged after 19 hours of charging, the test shall be terminated at 24 hours. Conversely, if the full-charge indication is not yet present after 19 hours of charging, the test shall continue until 5 hours after the indication is present.
(2) If there is no indicator, but the manufacturer's instructions indicate that charging this battery or this capacity of battery should be complete within 19 hours, the test shall be for 24 hours. If the instructions indicate that charging may take longer than 19 hours, the test shall be run for the longest estimated charge time plus 5 hours.
(3) If there is no indicator and no time estimate in the instructions, but the charging current is stated on the charger or in the instructions, calculate the test duration as the longer of 24 hours or:
b. If none of the above applies, the duration of the test shall be 24 hours.
a. No conditioning is to be done on lead-acid or lithium-ion batteries. The test technician shall proceed directly to battery preparation, section 5.4, when testing chargers for these batteries.
b. Products with integral batteries will have to be disassembled per the instructions in section 4.5, and the battery disconnected from the charger for discharging.
c. Batteries of other chemistries that have not been previously cycled are to be conditioned by performing two charges and two discharges, followed by a charge, as below. No data need be recorded during battery conditioning.
(1) The test battery shall be fully charged for the duration specified in section 5.2 or longer using the UUT.
(2) The test battery shall then be fully discharged using either:
(i) A battery analyzer at a rate not to exceed 1 C, until its average cell voltage under load reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 5.2 for the relevant battery chemistry; or
(ii) The UUT, until the UUT ceases operation due to low battery voltage.
(3) The test battery shall again be fully charged as in step c.(1) of this section.
(4) The test battery shall again be fully discharged as per step c.(2) of this section.
(5) The test battery shall be again fully charged as in step c.(1) of this section.
d. Batteries of chemistries other than lead-acid or lithium-ion that are known to have been through at least two previous full charge/discharge cycles shall only be charged once per step c.(5), of this section.
Following any conditioning prior to beginning the battery charge test (section 5.6), the test battery shall be fully discharged for the duration specified in section 5.2 or longer using a battery analyzer.
The test battery shall be rested between preparation and the battery charge test. The rest period shall be at least one hour and not exceed 24 hours. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 °C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended longer than 24 hours.
a. The Charge and Battery Maintenance Mode test measures the energy consumed during charge mode and some time spent in the maintenance mode of the UUT. Functions required for battery conditioning that happen only with some user-selected switch or other control shall not be included in this measurement. (The technician shall manually turn off any battery conditioning cycle or setting.) Regularly occurring battery conditioning or maintenance functions that are not controlled by the user will, by default, be incorporated into this measurement.
b. During the measurement period, input power values to the UUT shall be recorded at least once every minute.
(1) If possible, the technician shall set the data logging system to record the average power during the sample interval. The total energy is computed as the sum of power samples (in watts) multiplied by the sample interval (in hours).
(2) If this setting is not possible, then the power analyzer shall be set to integrate or accumulate the input power over the measurement period and this result shall be used as the total energy.
c. The technician shall follow these steps:
(1) Ensure that the user-controllable device functionality not associated with battery charging and any battery conditioning cycle or setting are turned off, as instructed in section 4.4;
(2) Ensure that the test battery used in this test has been conditioned, prepared, discharged, and rested as described in sections 5.3 through 5.7;
(3) Connect the data logging equipment to the battery charger;
(4) Record the start time of the measurement period, and begin logging the input power;
(5) Connect the test battery to the battery charger within 3 minutes of beginning logging. For integral battery products, connect the product to a cradle or wall adapter within 3 minutes of beginning logging;
(6) After the test battery is connected, record the initial time and power (W) of the input current to the UUT. These measurements shall be taken within the first 10 minutes of active charging;
(7) Record the input power for the duration of the “Charging and Maintenance Mode Test” period, as determined by section 5.2. The actual time that power is connected to the UUT shall be within ± 5 minutes of the specified period; and
(8) Disconnect power to the UUT, terminate data logging, and record the final time.
The test battery shall be rested between charging and discharging. The rest period shall be at least 1 hour and not more than 4 hours, with an exception for flooded cells. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 °C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended beyond 4 hours.
a. If multiple batteries were charged simultaneously, the discharge energy is the sum of the discharge energies of all the batteries.
(1) For a multi-port charger, batteries that were charged in separate ports shall be discharged independently.
(2) For a batch charger, batteries that were charged as a group may be discharged individually, as a group, or in sub-groups connected in series and/or parallel. The position of each battery with respect to the other batteries need not be maintained.
b. During discharge, the battery voltage and discharge current shall be sampled and recorded at least once per minute. The values recorded may be average or instantaneous values.
c. For this test, the technician shall follow these steps:
(1) Ensure that the test battery has been charged by the UUT and rested according to the procedures above.
(2) Set the battery analyzer for a constant discharge current of 0.2 °C and the end-of-discharge voltage in Table 5.2 for the relevant battery chemistry.
(3) Connect the test battery to the analyzer and begin recording the voltage, current, and wattage, if available from the battery analyzer. When the end-of-discharge voltage is reached or the UUT circuitry terminates the discharge, the test battery shall be returned to an open-circuit condition. If current continues to be drawn from the test battery after the end-of-discharge condition is first reached, this additional energy is not to be counted in the battery discharge energy.
d. If not available from the battery analyzer, the battery discharge energy (in watt-hours) is calculated by multiplying the voltage (in volts), current (in amperes), and sample period (in hours) for each sample, and then summing over all sample periods until the end-of-discharge voltage is reached.
After the measurement period is complete, the technician shall determine the average maintenance mode power consumption by examining the power-versus-time data from the charge and maintenance test and:
(1) If the maintenance mode power is cyclic or shows periodic pulses, compute the average power over a time period that spans a whole number of cycles and includes at least the last 4 hours.
(2) Otherwise, calculate the average power value over the last 4 hours.
The accumulated energy or the average input power, integrated over the test period from the charge and maintenance mode test, shall be used to calculate 24-hour energy consumption.
The standby mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows.
a. Conduct a measurement of standby power consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Disconnect the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power (
b. Standby mode may also apply to products with integral batteries. If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then “disconnecting the battery from the charger” will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and standby mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone.
c. If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and standby mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord (
d. Finally, if the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and standby mode measurement is not applicable.
The off mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows.
a. If the battery charger has manual on-off switches, record a measurement of off mode energy consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Remove the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power (
b. Off mode may also apply to products with integral batteries. If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then “disconnecting the battery from the charger” will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone.
c. If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord (
d. Finally, if the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and off mode measurement is not applicable.
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
3.
(a) Single-Voltage External Power Supply. The test apparatus, standard testing conditions, and instructions for testing external power supplies shall conform to the requirements specified in section 4, “General Conditions for Measurement,” of the CEC's “Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External AC-DC and AC-AC Power Supplies,” August 11, 2004. The test voltage specified in section 4.d, “Test Voltage,” shall only be 115 volts, 60 Hz.
(b) Multiple-Voltage External Power Supply. Unless otherwise specified, measurements shall be made under test conditions and with equipment specified below.
(i) Verifying Accuracy and Precision of Measuring Equipment
(A) Measurements of power 0.5 W or greater shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of power less than 0.5 W shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 0.01 W at the 95 percent confidence level. The power measurement instrument shall have a resolution of:
(1) 0.01 W or better for measurements up to 10 W;
(2) 0.1 W or better for measurements of 10 to 100 W; or
(3) 1 W or better for measurements over 100 W.
(B) Measurements of energy (Wh) shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of voltage and current shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 1 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of temperature shall be made with an uncertainty of ≤ 2 °C at the 95 percent confidence level.
(C) All equipment used to conduct the tests must be selected and calibrated to ensure that measurements will meet the above uncertainty requirements. For guidance on measuring low power levels, see IEC 62301,
All tests shall be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of ≤ 0.5 m/s. The ambient temperature shall be maintained at 20 °C ± 5 °C throughout the test. There shall be no intentional cooling of the UUT such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. The UUT shall be conditioned, rested, and tested on a thermally non-conductive surface. A readily available material such as Styrofoam will be sufficient.
(A) If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, it shall be tested at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, it shall not be tested. The input voltage shall be within ± 1 percent of the above specified voltage.
(B) If the input voltage is AC, the input frequency shall be within ± 1 percent of the specified frequency. The THD of the input voltage shall be ≤ 2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The crest factor of the input voltage shall be between 1.34 and 1.49.
4.
(a) Single-Voltage External Power Supply
(i) Standby Mode and Active Mode Measurement—The measurement of standby mode (also no-load mode) energy consumption and active mode efficiency shall conform to the requirements specified in section 5, “Measurement Approach” of the CEC's “Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies,” August 11, 2004, (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). Switch-selectable single-voltage external power supplies shall be tested twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest.
(A) If the product has more than two output wires, including those that are necessary for controlling the product, the manufacturer shall supply a connection diagram or test fixture that will allow the testing laboratory to put the unit under test into active mode.
(B) For those external power supplies that cannot sustain output at 100 percent loading condition, this efficiency metric shall not be included. For these external power supplies, the average efficiency is the average of the efficiencies measured at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of maximum load.
(C) In the case where the external power supply lists both an instantaneous and continuous output current, it shall be tested at the continuous condition only.
(ii) Off-Mode Measurement—If the external power supply unit under test incorporates manual on-off switches, the unit under test shall be placed in off mode, and its power consumption in off mode measured and recorded. The measurement of the off mode energy consumption shall conform to the requirements specified in section 5, “Measurement Approach,” of the CEC's “Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies,” August 11, 2004 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3), with two exceptions. In section 5.a, “Preparing UUT [Unit Under Test] for Test,” all manual on-off switches shall be placed in the “off” position for the measurement. In section 5.d, “Testing Sequence,” the technician shall consider the UUT stable if, over 5 minutes with samples taken at least once every second, the AC input power does not drift from the maximum value observed by more than 1 percent or 50 milliwatts, whichever is greater. The only loading condition that will be measured for off mode is “Load Condition 5” in Table 1 of the CEC's test procedure. Switch-selectable single-voltage external power supplies shall have their off mode power consumption measured twice— once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest.
(b) Multiple-Voltage External Power Supply—Power supplies must be tested with the output cord packaged with the unit for sale to the consumer, as it is considered part of the unit under test. There are two options for connecting metering equipment to the output of this type of power supply: cut the cord immediately adjacent to the output connector or attach leads and measure the efficiency from the output connector itself. If the power supply is attached directly to the product that it is powering, cut the cord immediately adjacent to the powered product and connect output measurement probes at that point. The tests should be conducted on the sets of output wires that constitute the output busses. If the product has additional wires, these should be left electrically disconnected unless they are necessary for controlling the product. In this case, the manufacturer shall supply a connection diagram or test fixture that will allow the testing laboratory to put the unit under test into active mode.
(i) Standby-Mode and Active-Mode Measurement—The measurement of the multiple-voltage external power supply standby mode (also no-load-mode) energy consumption and active-mode efficiency shall be as follows:
(A) Loading conditions and testing sequence. (1) If the unit under test has on-off switches, all switches shall be placed in the “on” position. Loading criteria for multiple-voltage external power supplies shall be based on nameplate output current and not
(2) The unit under test shall operate at 100 percent of nameplate current output for at least 30 minutes immediately before conducting efficiency measurements.
(3) After this warm-up period, the technician shall monitor AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the unit under test. If the power level does not drift by more than 1 percent from the maximum value observed, the unit under test can be considered stable and measurements can be recorded at the end of the 5-minute period. Measurements at subsequent loading conditions, listed in Table 1, can then be conducted under the same 5-minute stability guidelines. Only one warm-up period of 30 minutes is required for each unit under test at the beginning of the test procedure.
(4) If AC input power is not stable over a 5-minute period, the technician shall follow the guidelines established by IEC Standard 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for both input and output. (Reference for guidance only, see § 430.4).
(5) The unit under test shall be tested at the loading conditions listed in Table 1, derated per the proportional allocation method presented in the following section.
(6) Input and output power measurements shall be conducted in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4, as indicated in Table 1. For Loading Condition 5, the unit under test shall be placed in no-load mode, any additional signal connections to the unit under test shall be disconnected, and input power shall be measured.
(B) Proportional allocation method for loading multiple-voltage external power supplies. For power supplies with multiple voltage busses, defining consistent loading criteria is difficult because each bus has its own nameplate output current. The sum of the power dissipated by each bus loaded to its nameplate output current may exceed the overall nameplate output power of the power supply. The following proportional allocation method must be used to provide consistent loading conditions for multiple-voltage external power supplies. For additional explanation, please refer to section 6.1.1 of the California Energy Commission's “Proposed Test Protocol for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Internal Ac-Dc Power Supplies Revision 6.2,” November 2007.
(1) Consider a multiple-voltage power supply with
(2) If
(C) Minimum output current requirements. Depending on their application, some multiple-voltage power supplies may require a minimum output current for each output bus of the power supply for correct operation. In these cases, ensure that the load current for each output at Loading Condition 4 in Table 1 is greater than the minimum output current requirement. Thus, if the test method's calculated load current for a given voltage bus is smaller than the minimum output current requirement, the minimum output current must be used to load the bus. This load current shall be properly recorded in any test report.
(D) Test loads. Active loads such as electronic loads or passive loads such as rheostats used for efficiency testing of the unit under test shall be able to maintain the required current loading set point for each output voltage within an accuracy of ± 0.5 percent. If electronic load banks are used, their settings should be adjusted such that they provide a constant current load to the unit under test.
(E) Efficiency calculation. Efficiency shall be calculated by dividing the measured active output power of the unit under test at a given loading condition by the active AC
(F) Power consumption calculation. Power consumption of the unit under test at Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4 is the difference between the active output power at that Loading Condition and the active AC input power at that Loading Condition. The power consumption of Loading Condition 5 (no-load) is equal to the AC active input power at that Loading Condition.
(ii) Off Mode Measurement—If the multiple-voltage external power supply unit under test incorporates any on-off switches, the unit under test shall be placed in off mode and its power consumption in off mode measured and recorded. The measurement of the off mode energy consumption shall conform to the requirements specified in paragraph (4)(b)(i) of this appendix. Note that the only loading condition that will be measured for off mode is “Loading Condition 5” in paragraph (A), “Loading conditions and testing sequence”, except that all manual on-off switches shall be placed in the off position for the measurement.
This subpart contains energy conservation standards and water conservation standards (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) for classes of covered products that are required to be administered by the Department of Energy pursuant to the Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products Other Than Automobiles under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 6291
The energy and water (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) conservation standards for the covered product classes are:
(a)
The following standards remain in effect from July 1, 2001 until September 14, 2014:
The following standards apply to products manufactured starting on September 14, 2014:
(b)
(c)
(1) Split system central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured after January 1, 1992, and before January 23, 2006, and single package central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured after January 1, 1993, and before January 23, 2006, shall have Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio and Heating Seasonal Performance Factor no less than:
(2) Central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured on or after January 23, 2006, and before January 1, 2015, shall have Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio and Heating Seasonal Performance Factor no less than:
(3) Central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, shall have a Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio and Heating Seasonal Performance Factor not less than:
(4) In addition to meeting the applicable requirements in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, products in product class (i) of that paragraph (
(5) In addition to meeting the applicable requirements in paragraphs (c)(3) of this section, products in product classes (i) and (iii) of paragraph (c)(3) (
(6) Central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, shall have an average off mode electrical power consumption not more than the following:
(d)
(e)
(ii) The AFUE of residential non-weatherized furnaces manufactured on or after May 1, 2013, and weatherized gas and oil-fired furnaces manufactured on or after January 1, 2015 shall be not less than the following:
(iii) In addition to meeting the applicable requirements in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section, products in product classes (A) and (B) of that paragraph (
(iv) Furnaces manufactured on or after May 1, 2013, shall have an electrical standby mode power consumption (P
(2)
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(iv) of this section, the AFUE of residential boilers, manufactured on or after September 1, 2012, shall not be less than the following and must comply with the design requirements as follows:
(iii)
(B) For boilers that fire at a single input rate, the automatic means for adjusting water temperature requirement may be satisfied by providing an automatic means that allows the burner or heating element to fire only when the means has determined that the inferred heat load cannot be met by the residual heat of the water in the system.
(C) When there is no inferred heat load with respect to a hot water boiler, the automatic means described in this paragraph shall limit the temperature of the water in the boiler to not more than 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
(D) A boiler for which an automatic means for adjusting water temperature is required shall be operable only when the automatic means is installed.
(iv) A boiler that is manufactured to operate without any need for electricity or any electric connection, electric gauges, electric pumps, electric wires, or electric devices is not required to meet the AFUE or design requirements applicable to the boiler requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section, but must meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, as applicable.
(f)
(2) All dishwashers manufactured on or after January 1, 2010, shall meet the following standard—
(i) Standard size dishwashers shall not exceed 355 kwh/year and 6.5 gallons per cycle.
(ii) Compact size dishwashers shall not exceed 260 kwh/year and 4.5 gallons per cycle.
(g)
(2) Clothes washers manufactured on or after January 1, 2004, and before January 1, 2007, shall have a modified energy factor no less than:
(3) Clothes washers manufactured on or after January 1, 2007, shall have a modified energy factor no less than:
(4) All top-loading or front-loading standard-size residential clothes washers manufactured on or after January 1, 2011, shall meet the following standard—
(i) A Modified Energy Factor of at least 1.26; and
(ii) A water factor of not more than 9.5.
(h)
(2) Clothes dryers manufactured on or after May 14, 1994 and before January 1, 2015, shall have an energy factor no less than:
(3) Clothes dryers manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, shall have a combined energy factor no less than:
(i)
(2) Vented home heating equipment manufactured on or after April 16, 2013, shall have an annual fuel utilization efficiency no less than:
(j)
(2) Gas cooking products without an electrical supply cord shall not be equipped with a constant burning pilot light. This standard is effective on April 9, 2012.
(k)
(2) Gas-fired pool heaters manufactured on or after April 16, 2013, shall have a thermal efficiency not less than 82%.
(l)
(m)(1)
(i) (A) Manufactured on or after January 1, 1990;
(B) Sold by the manufacturer on or after April 1, 1990; or
(C) Incorporated into a luminaire by a luminaire manufacturer on or after April 1, 1991; and
(ii) Designed—
(A) To operate at nominal input voltages of 120 or 277 volts;
(B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and
(C) For use in connection with an F40T12, F96T12, or F96T12HO lamps shall have a power factor of 0.90 or greater and shall have a ballast efficacy factor not less than the following:
(2) The standards described in paragraph (m)(1) of this section do not apply to—
(i) A ballast that is designed for dimming or for use in ambient temperatures of 0 °F or less, or
(ii) A ballast that has a power factor of less than 0.90 and is designed for use only in residential building applications.
(3) Except as provided in paragraph (m)(4) of this section, each fluorescent lamp ballast—
(i) (A) Manufactured on or after April 1, 2005;
(B) Sold by the manufacturer on or after July 1, 2005; or
(C) Incorporated into a luminaire by a luminaire manufacturer on or after April 1, 2006; and
(ii) Designed—
(A) To operate at nominal input voltages of 120 or 277 volts;
(B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and
(C) For use in connection with an F40T12, F96T12, or F96T12HO lamps; shall have a power factor of 0.90 or greater and shall have a ballast efficacy factor not less than the following:
(4) (i) The standards described in paragraph (m)(3) do not apply to:
(A) A ballast that is designed for dimming to 50 percent or less of its maximum output;
(B) A ballast that is designed for use with two F96T12HO lamps at ambient temperatures of −20 °F or less and for use in an outdoor sign;
(C) A ballast that has a power factor of less than 0.90 and is designed and labeled for use only in residential building applications; or
(D) A replacement ballast as defined in paragraph (m)(4)(ii) of this section.
(ii) For purposes of this paragraph (m), a replacement ballast is defined as a ballast that:
(A) Is manufactured on or before June 30, 2010;
(B) Is designed for use to replace an existing ballast in a previously installed luminaire;
(C) Is marked “FOR REPLACEMENT USE ONLY”;
(D) Is shipped by the manufacturer in packages containing not more than 10 ballasts;
(E) Has output leads that when fully extended are a total length that is less than the length of the lamp with which it is intended to be operated; and
(F) Meets or exceeds the ballast efficacy factor in the following table:
(5) Except as provided in paragraph (m)(7) of this section, each fluorescent lamp ballast (other than replacement ballasts defined in § 430.2)—
(i)(A) Manufactured on or after July 1, 2009;
(B) Sold by the manufacturer on or after October 1, 2009; or
(C) Incorporated into a luminaire by a luminaire manufacturer on or after July 1, 2010; and
(ii) Designed—
(A) To operate at nominal input voltages of 120 or 277 volts;
(B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and
(C) For use in connection with F34T12 lamps, F96T12/ES lamps, or F96T12HO/ES lamps; shall have a power factor of 0.90 or greater and shall have a ballast efficacy factor of not less than the following:
(6) The standards in paragraph (m)(5) shall apply to all ballasts covered by paragraph (m)(5)(ii), including replacement ballasts and ballasts described in paragraph (m)(7) of this section, that are manufactured on or after July 1, 2010, or sold by the manufacturer on or after October 1, 2010.
(7) The standards in paragraph (m)(5) do not apply to—
(i) A ballast that is designed for dimming to 50 percent or less of the maximum output of the ballast;
(ii) A ballast that is designed for use with 2 F96T12HO lamps at ambient temperatures of 20 degrees F or less and for use in an outdoor sign; or
(iii) A ballast that has a power factor of less than 0.90 and is designed and labeled for use only in residential applications.
(n)
(2) The standards described in paragraph (n)(1) of this section do not apply to:
(i) Any 4-foot medium bipin lamp or 2-foot U-shaped lamp with a rated wattage less than 28 watts;
(ii) Any 8-foot high output lamp not defined in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) or related supplements, or not 0.800 nominal amperes; or
(iii) Any 8-foot slimline lamp not defined in ANSI C78.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3).
(3) Each of the following general service fluorescent lamps manufactured after July 14, 2012, shall meet or exceed the following lamp efficacy standards shown in the table:
(4) Except as provided in paragraph (n)(5) of this section, each of the following incandescent reflector lamps manufactured after November 1, 1995, shall meet or exceed the lamp efficacy standards shown in the table:
(5) Each of the following incandescent reflector lamps manufactured after July 14, 2012, shall meet or exceed the lamp efficacy standards shown in the table:
(6) (i)(A) Subject to the exclusions in paragraph (n)(6)(ii) of this section, the standards specified in this section shall apply to ER incandescent reflector lamps, BR incandescent reflector lamps, BPAR incandescent reflector lamps, and similar bulb shapes on and after January 1, 2008.
(B) Subject to the exclusions in paragraph (n)(6)(ii) of this section, the standards specified in this section shall apply to incandescent reflector lamps with a diameter of more than 2.25 inches, but not more than 2.75 inches, on and after June 15, 2008.
(ii) The standards specified in this section shall not apply to the following types of incandescent reflector lamps:
(A) Lamps rated at 50 watts or less that are ER30, BR30, BR40, or ER40 lamps;
(B) Lamps rated at 65 watts that are BR30, BR40, or ER40 lamps; or
(C) R20 incandescent reflector lamps rated 45 watts or less.
(o)
(p)
(q)
(2) The maximum water use allowed for flushometer valve toilets, other than blowout toilets, manufactured after January 1, 1997, shall be 1.6 gallons per flush (6.0 liters per flush).
(r)
(1) The maximum flow rate for a urinal and
(2) The length of the trough-type urinal in inches (millimeter) divided by 16 inches (406 millimeters).
(s)
(i) Fan speed controls separate from any lighting controls;
(ii) Adjustable speed controls (either more than 1 speed or variable speed);
(iii) The capability of reversible fan action, except for—
(A) Fans sold for industrial applications;
(B) Fans sold for outdoor applications; and
(C) Cases in which safety standards would be violated by the use of the reversible mode.
(2)(i) Ceiling fan light kits with medium screw base sockets manufactured on or after January 1, 2007, shall be
(ii) The screw-based lamps required under paragraph (2)(i) of this section shall—
(A) Meet the ENERGY STAR Program requirements for Compact Fluorescent Lamps, version 3; or
(B) Use light sources other than compact fluorescent lamps that have lumens per watt performance at least equivalent to comparable configured compact fluorescent lamps meeting the energy conservation standards described in paragraph (2)(ii)(A) of this section.
(3) Ceiling fan light kits with pin-based sockets for fluorescent lamps manufactured on or after January 1, 2007 shall—
(i) Meet the ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Residential Light Fixtures version 4.0 issued by the Environmental Protection Agency; and
(ii) Shall be packaged to include the lamps described in paragraph (s)(3)(i) of this section with the ceiling fan light kits to fill all sockets.
(4) Ceiling fan light kits with socket types other than those covered in paragraphs (2) and (3) of this section, including candelabra screw base sockets, manufactured on or after January 1, 2009—
(i) Shall not be capable of operating with lamps that total more than 190 watts; and
(ii) Shall be packaged to include the lamps described in clause (i) with the ceiling fan light kits.
(t)
(1) Consume not more than 190 watts of power; and
(2) Not be capable of operating with lamps that total more than 190 watts.
(u)
(v)
(2) Dehumidifiers manufactured on or after October 1, 2012, shall have an energy factor that meets or exceeds the following values:
(w)
(ii) A class A external power supply shall not be subject to the standards in paragraph w(1)(i) if the class A external power supply is—
(A) Manufactured during the period beginning on July 1, 2008, and ending on June 30, 2015, and
(B) Made available by the manufacturer as a service part or a spare part for an end-use product—
(1) That constitutes the primary load; and
(2) Was manufactured before July 1, 2008.
(3) The standards described in paragraph (w)(1)(i) shall not constitute an energy conservation standard for the separate end-use product to which the external power supply is connected.
(4) Any class A external power supply manufactured on or after July 1, 2008 shall be clearly and permanently marked in accordance with the External Power Supply International Efficiency Marking Protocol, as referenced in the ‘Energy Star Program Requirements for Single Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies,’ (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), published by the Environmental Protection Agency.
(iii)
(A) Is an AC-to-AC external power supply;
(B) Has a nameplate output of 20 watts or more;
(C) Is certified to the Secretary as being designed to be connected to a security or life safety alarm or surveillance system component; and
(D) On establishment within the External Power Supply International Efficiency Marking Protocol, as referenced in the “Energy Star Program Requirements for Single Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies” (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3), published by the Environmental Protection Agency, of a distinguishing mark for products described in this clause, is permanently marked with the distinguishing mark.
(x)
(i) Intended for a general service or general illumination application (whether incandescent or not);
(ii) Has a medium screw base or any other screw base not defined in ANSI C81.61 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); and
(iii) Is capable of being operated at a voltage at least partially within the range of 110 to 130 volts.
(A) General service incandescent lamps manufactured after the effective dates specified in the tables below, except as described in paragraph (x)(1)(B) of this section, shall have a color rendering index greater than or equal to 80 and shall have rated wattage no greater than and rated lifetime no less than the values shown in the table below:
(B) Modified spectrum general service incandescent lamps manufactured after the effective dates specified shall have a color rendering index greater than or equal to 75 and shall have a rated wattage no greater than and rated lifetime no less than the values shown in the table below:
(2) Each candelabra base incandescent lamp shall not exceed 60 rated watts.
(3) Each intermediate base incandescent lamp shall not exceed 40 rated watts.
For
At 76 FR 70628, Nov. 14, 2011, § 430.32 was amended by revising paragraph (m)(1) introductory text; and adding paragraphs (m)(8), (m)(9), and m(10), effective Jan. 13, 2012. For the convenience of the user, the added and revised text is set forth as follows:
(m)(1)
(8) Except as provided in paragraph (m)(9) of this section, each fluorescent lamp ballast—
(i) Manufactured on or after November 14, 2014;
(ii) Designed—
(A) To operate at nominal input voltages at or between 120 and 277 volts;
(B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and
(C) For use in connection with fluorescent lamps (as defined in § 430.2)
(iii) Shall have—
(A) A power factor of 0.9 or greater except for those ballasts defined in paragraph (m)(8)(iii)(B) of this section;
(B) A power factor of 0.5 or greater for residential ballasts, which are defined in (m)(8)(vi) of this section;
(C) A ballast luminous efficiency not less than the following:
(iv) Instant start, rapid start, and programmed start are defined in appendix Q1 of subpart B of this part. Average total lamp arc power is as defined and measured in accordance with appendix Q1 of subpart B of this part.
(v) Sign ballasts have an Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Type 2 rating and are designed, labeled, and marketed for use in outdoor signs.
(vi) Residential ballasts meet FCC consumer limits as set forth in 47 CFR part 18 and are designed and labeled for use in residential applications.
(9) The standards described in paragraph (m)(8) of this section do not apply to:
(i) A ballast that is designed for dimming to 50 percent or less of the maximum output of the ballast except for those specified in m(10); and
(ii) A low frequency ballast (as defined in appendix Q1 to subpart of this part) that:
(A) Is designed to operate T8 diameter lamps;
(B) Is designed, labeled, and marketed for use in EMI-sensitive environments only;
(C) Is shipped by the manufacturer in packages containing 10 or fewer ballasts; and
(iii) A programmed start ballast that operates 4-foot medium bipin T8 lamps and delivers on average less than 140 milliamperes to each lamp.
(10) Each fluorescent lamp ballast—
(i) Manufactured on or after November 14, 2014;
(ii) Designed—
(A) To operate at nominal input voltages of 120 or 277 volts;
(B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and
(C) For use in connection with fluorescent lamps (as defined in § 430.2);
(D) For dimming to 50 percent or less of the maximum output of the ballast
(iii) Shall have—
(A) A power factor of 0.9 or greater except for those ballasts defined in paragraph (m)(8)(iii)(B) of this section;
(B) A power factor of 0.5 or greater for residential ballasts, which meet FCC Part B consumer limits and are designed and labeled for use only in residential applications;
(C) A ballast luminous efficiency of not less than the following:
(a) Any State regulation providing for any energy conservation standard, or water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals), or other requirement with respect to the energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, or urinals) of a covered product that is not identical to a Federal standard in effect under this subpart is preempted by that standard, except as provided for in sections 325(i)(6)(A)(vi), 327(b) and (c) of the Act.
(b) No State regulation, or revision thereof, concerning the energy efficiency, energy use, or water use of the covered product shall be effective with respect to such covered product, unless the State regulation or revision in the case of any portion of any regulation that establishes requirements for general service incandescent lamps, intermediate base incandescent lamps, or candelabra base lamps, was enacted or adopted by the State of California or Nevada before December 4, 2007, except that—
(1) The regulation adopted by the California Energy Commission with an effective date of January 1, 2008, shall only be effective until the effective date of the Federal standard for the applicable lamp category under paragraphs (A), (B), and (C) of section 325(i)(1) of EPCA;
(2) The States of California and Nevada may, at any time, modify or adopt a State standard for general service lamps to conform with Federal standards with effective dates no earlier than 12 months prior to the Federal effective dates prescribed under paragraphs (A), (B), and (C) of section 325(i)(1) of EPCA, at which time any prior regulations adopted by the State of California or Nevada shall no longer be effective; and
(3) All other States may, at any time, modify or adopt a State standard for general service lamps to conform with Federal standards and effective dates.
The Department of Energy may not prescribe any amended standard which increases the maximum allowable energy use or, in the case of showerheads, faucets, water closets or urinals, the maximum allowable water use, or which decreases the minimum required energy efficiency of a covered product.
(a) Any person may petition the Secretary for an exemption for a type of general service lamp from the requirements of this subpart. The Secretary may grant an exemption only to the extent that the Secretary finds, after a hearing and opportunity for public comment, that it is not technically feasible to serve a specialized lighting application (such as a military, medical, public safety or certified historic lighting application) using a lamp that meets the requirements of this subpart. To grant an exemption for a product under this paragraph, the Secretary shall include, as an additional criterion, that the exempted product is unlikely to be used in a general service lighting application.
(b) Any person may petition the Secretary to establish standards for lamp shapes or bases that are excluded from the definition of general service lamps. The petition shall include evidence that the availability or sales of exempted lamps have increased significantly since December 19, 2007. The Secretary shall grant a petition if the Secretary finds that:
(1) The petition presents evidence that demonstrates that commercial availability or sales of exempted incandescent lamp types have increased significantly since December 19, 2007 and are being widely used in general lighting applications; and
(2) Significant energy savings could be achieved by covering exempted products, as determined by the Secretary based on sales data provided to the Secretary from manufacturers and importers.
This appendix establishes procedures, interpretations and policies to guide the DOE in the consideration and promulgation of new or revised appliance efficiency standards under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA). The Department's objectives in establishing these guidelines include:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(a) The procedures, interpretations and policies described in this appendix will be fully applicable to:
(1) Rulemakings concerning new or revised Federal energy conservation standards for consumer products initiated after August 14, 1996, and
(2) Rulemakings concerning new or revised Federal energy conservation standards for consumer products that have been initiated but for which a Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (NOPR) has not been published as of August 14, 1996.
(b) For rulemakings described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, to the extent analytical work has already been done or public comment on an ANOPR has already been provided, such analyses and comment will be considered, as appropriate, in proceeding under the new process.
(c) With respect to incomplete rulemakings concerning new or revised Federal energy conservation standards for consumer products for which a NOPR was published prior to August 14, 1996, the Department will conduct a case-by-case review to decide whether any of the analytical or procedural steps already completed should be repeated. In any case, the approach described in this appendix will be used to the extent possible to conduct any analytical or procedural steps that have not been completed.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(1) Potential energy savings.
(2) Potential economic benefits.
(3) Potential environmental or energy security benefits.
(4) Applicable deadlines for rulemakings.
(5) Incremental DOE resources required to complete rulemaking process.
(6) Other relevant regulatory actions affecting products.
(7) Stakeholder recommendations.
(8) Evidence of energy efficiency gains in the market absent new or revised standards.
(9) Status of required changes to test procedures.
(10) Other relevant factors.
This section describes the process to be used in developing efficiency standards and the factors to be considered in the process. The policies of the Department to guide the selection of standards and the decisions preliminary thereto are described in section 5.
(a)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(i) Technological feasibility. Technologies incorporated in commercial products or in working prototypes will be considered technologically feasible.
(ii) Practicability to manufacture, install and service. If mass production of a technology in commercial products and reliable installation and servicing of the technology could be achieved on the scale necessary to serve the relevant market at the time of the effective date of the standard, then that technology will be considered practicable to manufacture, install and service.
(iii) Adverse Impacts on Product Utility or Product Availability.
(iv) Adverse Impacts on Health or Safety.
(5)
(b)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(c)
(ii) If the preliminary analysis indicates that no candidate standard level is likely to meet the criteria specified in law, that conclusion will be announced. In such cases, the Department may decide to proceed with a rulemaking that proposes not to adopt new or amended standards, or it may suspend the rulemaking and conclude that further action on such standards should be assigned a low priority under section 3.
(2)
(3)
If major changes are required at this stage, interested parties and experts will be given an opportunity to review the revised analysis.
(d)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(i) Consensus stakeholder recommendations.
(ii) Impacts on manufacturers. The analysis of manufacturer impacts will include: Estimated impacts on cash flow; assessment of impacts on manufacturers of specific categories of products and small manufacturers; assessment of impacts on manufacturers of multiple product-specific Federal regulatory requirements, including efficiency standards for other products and regulations of other agencies; and impact on manufacturing capacity, plant closures, and loss of capital investment.
(iii) Impacts on consumers. The analysis of consumer impacts will include: Estimated impacts on consumers based on national average energy prices and energy usage; assessments of impacts on subgroups of consumers based on major regional differences in usage or energy prices and significant variations in installation costs or performance; sensitivity analyses using high and low discount rates and high and low energy price forecasts; consideration of changes to product utility and other impacts of likely concern to all or some consumers, based to the extent practicable on direct input from consumers; estimated life-cycle cost with sensitivity analysis; and consideration of the increased first cost to consumers and the time required for energy cost savings to pay back these first costs.
(iv) Impacts on competition.
(v) Impacts on utilities. The analysis of utility impacts will include estimated marginal impacts on electric and gas utility costs and revenues.
(vi) National energy, economic and employment impacts. The analysis of national energy, economic and employment impacts will include: Estimated energy savings by fuel type; estimated net present value of benefits to all consumers; and estimates of the direct and indirect impacts on employment by appliance manufacturers, relevant service industries, energy suppliers and the economy in general.
(vii) Impacts on the environment and energy security. The analysis of environmental and energy security impacts will include estimated impacts on emissions of carbon and relevant criteria pollutants, impacts on pollution control costs, and impacts on oil use.
(viii) Impacts of non-regulatory approaches. The analysis of energy savings and consumer impacts will incorporate an assessment of the impacts of market forces and existing voluntary programs in promoting product efficiency, usage and related characteristics in the absence of updated efficiency standards.
(ix) New information relating to the factors used for screening design options.
(e)
(2)
(3)
(f)
(a)
These policies are intended to elaborate on the statutory criteria provided in section 325 of the EPCA, 42 U.S.C. 6295.
(2) The policies described below are intended to provide guidance for making the determinations required by EPCA. This statement of policy is not intended to preclude consideration of any information pertinent to the statutory criteria. The Department will consider all pertinent information in determining whether a new or revised standard is consistent with the statutory criteria. Moreover, the Department will not be guided by a policy in this section if, in the particular circumstances presented, such a policy would lead to a result inconsistent with the criteria in section 325 of EPCA.
(b)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(c)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(i) The range of candidate standard levels will typically include:
(A) The most energy efficient combination of design options;
(B) The combination of design options with the lowest life-cycle cost; and
(C) A combination of design options with a payback period of not more than three years.
(ii) Candidate standard levels that incorporate noteworthy technologies or fill in large gaps between efficiency levels of other candidate standard levels also may be selected.
(d)
(e)
(1)
(i) A candidate standard level will not be proposed or promulgated if the Department determines that it is not technologically feasible and economically justified. See EPCA section 325(o)(3)(B). A standard level is economically justified if the benefits exceed the burdens. See EPCA section 325(o)(2)(B)(i). A standard level is rebuttably presumed to be economically justified if the payback period is three years or less. See EPCA section 325(o)(2)(B)(iii).
(ii) If the Department determines that a standard level is likely to result in the unavailability of any covered product type with performance characteristics (including reliability), features, sizes, capacities, and volumes that are substantially the same as products generally available in the U.S. at the time, that standard level will not be proposed. See EPCA section 325(o)(4).
(iii) If the Department determines that a standard level would not result in significant conservation of energy, that standard level will not be proposed. See EPCA section 325(o)(3)(B).
(2)
(3)
(i) The following policies will guide the application of the economic justification criterion in selecting a proposed standard:
(A) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level would result in a negative return on investment for the industry, would significantly reduce the value of the industry, or would cause significant adverse impacts to a significant subgroup of manufacturers (including small manufacturing businesses), that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh this and any other expected adverse effects.
(B) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level would be the direct cause of plant closures, significant losses in domestic manufacturer employment, or significant losses of capital investment by domestic manufacturers, that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh this and any other expected adverse effects.
(C) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level would have a significant adverse impact on the environment or energy security, that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh this and any other expected adverse effects.
(D) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level would not result in significant energy conservation relative to non-regulatory approaches, that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that other specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh the expected adverse effects.
(E) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level is not consistent with the policies relating to practicability to manufacture, consumer utility, or safety in paragraphs (b) (2), (3) and (4) of this section, that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh this and any other expected adverse effects.
(F) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level is not consistent with the policies relating to consumer costs in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh this and any other expected adverse effects.
(G) If the Department determines that a candidate standard level will have significant adverse impacts on a significant subgroup of consumers (including low-income consumers), that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the standard would outweigh this and any other expected adverse effects.
(H) If the Department or the Department of Justice determines that a candidate standard level would have significant anticompetitive effects, that standard level will be presumed not to be economically justified unless the Department determines that specifically identified expected benefits of the
(ii) The basis for a determination that triggers any presumption in paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section and the basis for a determination that an applicable presumption has been rebutted will be supported by substantial evidence in the record and the evidence and rationale for making these determinations will be explained in the NOPR.
(iii) If none of the policies in paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section is found to be dispositive, the Department will determine whether the benefits of a candidate standard level exceed the burdens considering all the pertinent information in the record.
(f)
The effective date for new or revised standards will be established so that the period between the publication of the final rule and the effective date is not less than any period between the dates for publication and effective date provided for in EPCA. The effective date of any revised standard will be established so that the period between the effective date of the prior standard and the effective date of such revised standard is not less than period between the two effective dates provided for in EPCA.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a) The purpose of the engineering analysis is to develop the relationship between efficiency and cost of the subject product. The Department will use the most appropriate means available to determine the efficiency/cost relationship, including an overall system approach or engineering modeling to predict the improvement in efficiency that can be expected from individual design options as discussed in the paragraphs below. From this efficiency/cost relationship, measures such as payback, life cycle cost, and energy savings can be developed. The Department, in consultation with interested parties, will identify issues that will be examined in the engineering analysis and the types of specialized expertise that may be required. With these specifications, DOE will select appropriate contractors, subcontractors, and expert consultants, as necessary, to
(b) The engineering analysis begins with the list of design options developed in consultation with the interested parties as a result of the screening process. In consultation with the technology/industry expert peer review group, the Department will establish the likely cost and performance improvement of each design option. Ranges and uncertainties of cost and performance will be established, although efforts will be made to minimize uncertainties by using measures such as test data or component or material supplier information where available. Estimated uncertainties will be carried forward in subsequent analyses. The use of quantitative models will be supplemented by qualitative assessments as appropriate.
(c) The next step includes identifying, modifying or developing any engineering models necessary to predict the efficiency impact of any one or combination of design options on the product. A base case configuration or starting point will be established as well as the order and combination/blending of the design options to be evaluated. The DOE, utilizing expert consultants, will then perform the engineering analysis and develop the cost efficiency curve for the product. The cost efficiency curve and any necessary models will be subject to peer review before being issued with the ANOPR.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(1) Manufacturers and their relative market shares;
(2) Manufacturer characteristics, such as whether manufacturers make a full line of models or serve a niche market;
(3) Trends in the number of manufacturers;
(4) Financial situation of manufacturers;
(5) Trends in product characteristics and retail markets; and
(6) Identification of other relevant regulatory actions and a description of the nature and timing of any likely impacts.
(d)
(1) Estimates of total cost impacts, including product-specific costs (based on cost impacts estimated for the engineering analysis) and front-end investment/conversion costs for the full range of product models.
(2) Range of uncertainties in estimates of average cost, considering alternative designs and technologies which may vary cost impacts and changes in costs of material, labor and other inputs which may vary costs.
(3) Variable cost impacts on particular types of manufacturers, considering factors such as atypical sunk costs or characteristics of specific models which may increase or decrease costs.
(e)
(f)
(1) Industry net present value, with sensitivity analyses based on uncertainty of costs, sales prices and sales volumes;
(2) Cash flows, by year;
(3) Other measures of impact, such as revenue, net income and return on equity, as appropriate;
The characteristics of atypical manufacturers worthy of special consideration will be determined in consultation with manufacturers and other interested parties and may include: manufacturers incurring higher or lower than average costs; and manufacturers experiencing greater or fewer adverse impacts on sales. Alternative scenarios based on other methods of estimating cost or sales impacts also will be performed, as needed.
(g)
(2) If the Department determines that a proposed standard would impose a significant impact on product manufacturers within three years of the effective date of another DOE standard that imposes significant impacts on the same manufacturers (or divisions thereof, as appropriate), the Department will, in addition to evaluating the impact on manufacturers of the proposed standard, assess the joint impacts of both standards on manufacturers.
(3) If the Department is directed to establish or revise standards for products that are components of other products subject to standards, the Department will consider the interaction between such standards in setting rulemaking priorities and assessing manufacturer impacts of a particular standard. The Department will assess, as part of the engineering and impact analyses, the cost of components subject to efficiency standards.
(h)
(i)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(2) If, in the analysis of consumer impacts, the Department determines that a candidate standard level would result in a substantial increase in the product first costs to consumers or would not pay back such additional first costs through energy cost savings in less than three years, Department will specifically assess the likely impacts of such a standard on low-income households, product sales and fuel switching.
(a) The Department recognizes that voluntary or other non-regulatory efforts by manufacturers, utilities and other interested parties can result in substantial efficiency improvements. The Department intends to consider fully the likely effects of non-regulatory initiatives on product energy use, consumer utility and life cycle costs, manufacturers, competition, utilities and the environment, as well as the distribution of these impacts among different regions, consumers, manufacturers and utilities. DOE will attempt to base its assessment on the actual impacts of such initiatives to date, but also will consider information presented regarding the impacts that any existing initiative might have in the future. Such information is likely to include a demonstration of the strong commitment of manufacturers, distribution channels, utilities or others to such voluntary efficiency improvements. This information will be used in assessing the likely incremental impacts of establishing or revising standards, in assessing appropriate effective dates for new or revised standards and in considering DOE support of non-regulatory initiatives.
(b) DOE believes that non-regulatory approaches are valuable complements to the standards program. In particular, DOE will consider pursuing voluntary programs where it appears that highly efficient products can obtain a significant market share but less efficient products cannot be eliminated altogether because, for instance, of unacceptable adverse impacts on a significant subgroup of consumers. In making this assessment, the Department will consider the success more efficient designs have had in the market, their acceptance to date, and their potential market penetration.
In selecting values for certain crosscutting analytical assumptions, DOE expects to continue relying upon the following sources and general principles:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a) This subpart prescribes the procedures to be followed in connection with petitions requesting a rule that a State regulation prescribing an energy conservation standard, water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals), or other requirement respecting energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) of a type (or class) of covered product not be preempted.
(b) This subpart also prescribes the procedures to be followed in connection with petitions to withdraw a rule exempting a State regulation prescribing an energy conservation standard, water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals), or other requirement respecting energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) of a type (or class) of covered product.
(a)
(1)
(i) The name, address, and telephone number of the petitioner;
(ii) A copy of the State standard for which a rule exempting such standard is sought;
(iii) A copy of the State's energy plan or water plan and forecast;
(iv) Specification of each type or class of covered product for which a rule exempting a standard is sought;
(v) Other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and
(vi) Such other information as the Secretary may require.
(2) [Reserved]
(b)
(1)
(i) A description of the energy emergency condition or water emergency condition (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) which exists within the State, including causes and impacts.
(ii) A description of emergency response actions taken by the State and utilities within the State to alleviate the emergency condition;
(iii) An analysis of why the emergency condition cannot be alleviated substantially by importation of energy or water or the use of interconnection agreements; and
(iv) An analysis of how the State standard can alleviate substantially such emergency condition.
(2) [Reserved]
(c)
(1)
(i) The name, address and telephone number of the petitioner;
(ii) A statement of the interest of the petitioner for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought;
(iii) A copy of the State standard for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought;
(iv) Specification of each type or class of covered product for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought;
(v) A discussion of the factors contained in paragraph (a) of this section;
(vi) Such other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and
(vii) Such other information as the Secretary may require.
(2) [Reserved]
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(2) Saturdays, Sundays, and intervening Federal legal holidays shall be excluded from the computation of time when the period of time allowed or prescribed is 7 days or less.
(3) When a submission is required to be made within a prescribed time, DOE may grant an extension of time upon good cause shown.
(4) Documents received after regular business hours are deemed to have been submitted on the next regular business day. Regular business hours for the DOE's National Office, Washington, DC, are 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.
(5) DOE reserves the right to refuse to accept, and not to consider, untimely submissions.
(e)
(2) A petition may be submitted on behalf of more than one person. A joint petition shall indicate each person participating in the submission. A joint petition shall provide the information required by § 430.41 for each person on whose behalf the petition is submitted.
(3) All petitions shall be signed by the person(s) submitting the petition or by a duly authorized representative. If submitted by a duly authorized representative, the petition shall certify this authorization.
(4) A petition for a rule to withdraw a rule exempting a State regulation, all supporting documents, and all future submissions shall be served on each State agency, department, or instrumentality whose regulation the petitioner seeks to supersede. The petition shall contain a certification of this service which states the name and mailing address of the served parties, and the date of service.
(f)
(2) For purposes of the Act and this subpart, a petition is deemed to be filed on the date it is accepted for filing.
(g)
(a) Promptly after receipt of a petition and its acceptance for filing, notice of such petition shall be published in the
(b) In addition to the material required under paragraph (a) of this section, each notice shall contain a summary of the State regulation at issue
DOE may consolidate any or all matters at issue in two or more proceedings docketed where there exist common parties, common questions of fact and law, and where such consolidation would expedite or simplify consideration of the issues. Consolidation shall not affect the right of any party to raise issues that could have been raised if consolidation had not occurred.
The Secretary may hold a public hearing, and publish notice in the
(a) After the submission of public comments under § 430.42(a), the Secretary shall prescribe a final rule or deny the petition within 6 months after the date the petition is filed.
(b) The final rule issued by the Secretary or a determination by the Secretary to deny the petition shall include a written statement setting forth his findings and conclusions, and the reasons and basis therefor. A copy of the Secretary's decision shall be sent to the petitioner and the affected State agency. The Secretary shall publish in the
(c) If the Secretary finds that he cannot issue a final rule within the 6-month period pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, he shall publish a notice in the
(a) A final rule exempting a State standard from Federal preemption will be effective:
(1) Upon publication in the
(2) Three years after such rule is published in the
(3) Five years after such rule is published in the
(b) A final rule withdrawing a rule exempting a State standard will be effective upon publication in the
(a) Any petitioner whose petition for a rule has been denied may request reconsideration within 30 days of denial. The request shall contain a statement of facts and reasons supporting reconsideration and shall be submitted in writing to the Secretary.
(b) The denial of a petition will be reconsidered only where it is alleged and demonstrated that the denial was based on error in law or fact and that evidence of the error is found in the record of the proceedings.
(c) If the Secretary fails to take action on the request for reconsideration within 30 days, the request is deemed denied, and the petitioner may seek such judicial review as may be appropriate and available.
(d) A petitioner has not exhausted other administrative remedies until a request for reconsideration has been filed and acted upon or deemed denied.
(a) A decision to prescribe a rule that a State energy conservation standard, water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) or other requirement not be preempted is final on the
(b) A decision to prescribe a rule withdrawing a rule exempting a State standard or other requirement is final on the date the rule is issued, i.e., signed by the Secretary. A decision to deny such a petition is final on the day a denial of a request for reconsideration is issued, i.e., signed by the Secretary.
(a) This subpart establishes procedures for the submission and disposition of applications filed by manufacturers of covered consumer products with annual gross revenues that do not exceed $8 million to exempt them temporarily from all or part of energy conservation standards or water conservation standards (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) established by this part.
(b) The purpose of this subpart is to provide content and format requirements for manufacturers of covered consumer products with low annual gross revenues who desire to apply for temporary exemptions from applicable energy conservation standards or water conservation standards (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) .
Any manufacturer of a covered product with annual gross revenues that do not exceed $8,000,000 from all its operations (including the manufacture and sale of covered products) for the 12-month period preceding the date of application may apply for an exemption. In determining the annual gross revenues of any manufacturer under this subpart, the annual gross revenue of any other person who controls, is controlled, by, or is under common control with, such manufacturer shall be taken into account.
(a) Each application filed under this subpart shall be submitted in triplicate to: U.S. Department of Energy, Small Business Exemptions, Appliance Efficiency Standards, Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, Forrestal Building, 1000 Independence Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20585.
(b) An application shall be in writing and shall include the following:
(1) Name and mailing address of applicant;
(2) Whether the applicant controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with another manufacturer, and if so, the nature of that control relationship;
(3) The text or substance of the standard or portion thereof for which the exemption is sought and the length of time desired for the exemption;
(4) Information showing the annual gross revenue of the applicant for the preceding 12-month period from all of its operations (including the manufacture and sale of covered products):
(5) Information to show that failure to grant an exemption is likely to result in a lessening of competition;
(6) Such other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and
(7) Such other information as the Secretary may require.
(a) The applicant shall serve a copy of the application, all supporting documents and all subsequent submissions, or a copy from which confidential information has been deleted pursuant to 10 CFR 1004.11, to the Secretary, which may be made available for public review.
(b) Within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of an application, the Secretary will either accept it for filing or reject it, and the applicant will be so notified in writing. Only such applications which conform to the requirements of
(c) For the purpose of this subpart, an application is deemed to be filed on the date it is accepted for filing.
(d) Promptly after receipt of an application and its acceptance for filing, notice of such application shall be published in the
(e) The Secretary on his own initiative may convene a hearing if, in his discretion, he considers such hearing will advance his evaluation of the application.
Notice of the application for exemption under this subpart shall be transmitted to the Attorney General by the Secretary and shall contain (a) a statement of the facts and of the reasons for the exemption, and (b) copies of all documents submitted.
The Secretary shall grant an application for exemption submitted under this subpart if the Secretary finds, after obtaining the written views of the Attorney General, that a failure to allow an exemption would likely result in a lessening of competition.
(a) Upon consideration of the application and other relevant information received or obtained, the Secretary shall issue an order granting or denying the application.
(b) The order shall include a written statement setting forth the relevant facts and the legal basis of the order.
(c) The Secretary shall serve a copy of the order upon the applicant and upon any other person readily identifiable by the Secretary as one who is interested in or aggrieved by such order. The Secretary also shall publish in the
A temporary exemption terminates according to its terms but not later than twenty-four months after the affective date of the rule for which the exemption is allowed.